Add a new asm hook to print the end of a variable definition.
[gcc.git] / gcc / doc / tm.texi.in
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
25
26 @menu
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
56 * Misc:: Everything else.
57 @end menu
58
59 @node Target Structure
60 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
61 @cindex target hooks
62 @cindex target functions
63
64 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
65 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
66 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
67 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
68 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
69 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
70 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
71 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
72 @smallexample
73 #include "target.h"
74 #include "target-def.h"
75
76 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
77
78 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
79 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
80
81 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
82 @end smallexample
83 @end deftypevar
84
85 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
86 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
87 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
88 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
89 @code{targetm} structure.
90
91 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
92 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
93 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
94 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
95 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
96 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
97 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
98
99 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
100 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
101 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
102 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
103 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
104 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
105 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
106 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
107 default definition is used.
108
109 @node Driver
110 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
111 @cindex driver
112 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
113
114 @c prevent bad page break with this line
115 You can control the compilation driver.
116
117 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
118 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
119 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
120
121 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
122 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
123 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
124 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
125 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
126 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
127
128 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
129 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
130 that the other specs are easier to write.
131
132 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
133 @end defmac
134
135 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
136 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
137 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
138 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
139 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
140
141 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
142 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
143 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
144 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
145 everywhere it occurs.
146
147 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
148 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
149 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
150
151 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
152 @end defmac
153
154 @defmac CPP_SPEC
155 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
156 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
157 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
158
159 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
160 @end defmac
161
162 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
163 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
164 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
165 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
166 @end defmac
167
168 @defmac CC1_SPEC
169 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
170 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
171 front ends.
172 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
173 for GCC to pass to front ends.
174
175 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
176 @end defmac
177
178 @defmac CC1PLUS_SPEC
179 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
180 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
181 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
182
183 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
184 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
185 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
186 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
187 @end defmac
188
189 @defmac ASM_SPEC
190 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
191 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
192 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
193 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
194
195 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
196 @end defmac
197
198 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
199 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
200 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
201 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
202 an example of this.
203
204 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
205 @end defmac
206
207 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
208 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
209 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
210 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
211 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
212 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
213
214 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
215 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
216 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
217 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
218 @end defmac
219
220 @defmac LINK_SPEC
221 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
222 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
223 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
224
225 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
226 @end defmac
227
228 @defmac LIB_SPEC
229 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
230 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
231 command given to the linker.
232
233 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
234 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
235 @end defmac
236
237 @defmac LIBGCC_SPEC
238 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
239 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
240 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
241 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
242
243 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
244 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
245 @end defmac
246
247 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
248 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
249 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
250 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
251 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
252 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
253 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
254 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
255 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
256 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
257 @end defmac
258
259 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
260 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
261 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
262 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
263 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
264 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
265 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
266 @end defmac
267
268 @defmac LINK_EH_SPEC
269 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
270 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
271 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
272 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
273 @end defmac
274
275 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
276 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
277 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
278 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
279
280 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
281 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
282 @end defmac
283
284 @defmac ENDFILE_SPEC
285 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
286 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
287 the very end of the command given to the linker.
288
289 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
290 @end defmac
291
292 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
293 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
294 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
295 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
296 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
297 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
298 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
299 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
300 @end defmac
301
302 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
303 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
304 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
305 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
306 @end defmac
307
308 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
309 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
310 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
311 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
312 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
313 @end defmac
314
315 @defmac EXTRA_SPECS
316 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
317 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
318 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
319
320 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
321 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
322 string constant that provides the specification.
323
324 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
325
326 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
327 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
328 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
329 these definitions.
330
331 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
332 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
333 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
334 used.
335
336 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
337
338 @smallexample
339 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
340 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
341
342 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
343 @end smallexample
344
345 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
346 @smallexample
347 #undef CPP_SPEC
348 #define CPP_SPEC \
349 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
350 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
351 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
352 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
353
354 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
355 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
356 @end smallexample
357
358 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
359 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
360
361 @smallexample
362 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
363 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
364 @end smallexample
365 @end defmac
366
367 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
368 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
369 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
370 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
371 @end defmac
372
373 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
374 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
375 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
376 @end defmac
377
378 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
379 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
380 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
381 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
382 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
383 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
384 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
385 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
386 @end defmac
387
388 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
389
390 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
391 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
392 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
393 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
394 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
395
396 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
397 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
398 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
399 @xref{Target Fragment}.
400 @end defmac
401
402 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
403 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
404 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
405 indicates an absolute file name.
406 @end defmac
407
408 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
409 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
410 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
411 when the compiler is built as a cross
412 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
413 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.in}.
414 @end defmac
415
416 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
417 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
418 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
419 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
420 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
421 is built as a cross compiler.
422 @end defmac
423
424 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
425 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
426 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
427 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
428 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
429 is built as a cross compiler.
430 @end defmac
431
432 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
433 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
434 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
435 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
436 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
437 is built as a cross compiler.
438 @end defmac
439
440 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
441 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
442 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
443 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
444 @end defmac
445
446 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
447 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
448 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
449 cross compiler.
450 @end defmac
451
452 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
453 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
454 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
455 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
456 initialize the necessary environment variables.
457 @end defmac
458
459 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
460 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
461 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
462 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
463 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
464 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
465
466 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
467 replacement.
468 @end defmac
469
470 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
471 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
472 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
473 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
474 @end defmac
475
476 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
477 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
478 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
479 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
480 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
481 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
482 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
483 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
484 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
485
486 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
487 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
488 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
489 for C++-only directories,
490 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
491 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
492 the array with a null element.
493
494 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
495 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
496 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
497 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
498
499 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
500
501 @smallexample
502 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
503 @{ \
504 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
505 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
506 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
507 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
508 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
509 @}
510 @end smallexample
511 @end defmac
512
513 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
514
515 @enumerate
516 @item
517 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
518
519 @item
520 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
521 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
522 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
523
524 @item
525 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
526
527 @item
528 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
529 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
530
531 @item
532 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
533
534 @item
535 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
536
537 @item
538 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
539 compiler.
540 @end enumerate
541
542 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
543
544 @enumerate
545 @item
546 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
547
548 @item
549 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
550 value based on the installed toolchain location.
551
552 @item
553 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
554 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
555
556 @item
557 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
558 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
559
560 @item
561 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
562
563 @item
564 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
565 compiler.
566
567 @item
568 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
569 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
570
571 @item
572 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
573 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
574
575 @item
576 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
577 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
578 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
579
580 @item
581 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
582 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
583 @file{/lib/}.
584
585 @item
586 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
587 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
588 @file{/usr/lib/}.
589 @end enumerate
590
591 @node Run-time Target
592 @section Run-time Target Specification
593 @cindex run-time target specification
594 @cindex predefined macros
595 @cindex target specifications
596
597 @c prevent bad page break with this line
598 Here are run-time target specifications.
599
600 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
601 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
602 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
603 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
604 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
605 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
606 finished command line option processing your code can use those
607 results freely.
608
609 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
610 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
611 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
612 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
613
614 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
615 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
616 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
617 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
618 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
619 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
620 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
621 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
622 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
623 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
624
625 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
626 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
627 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
628 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
629 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
630 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
631 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
632 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
633 preprocessing.
634 @end defmac
635
636 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
637 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
638 and is used for the target operating system instead.
639 @end defmac
640
641 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
642 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
643 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
644 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
645 it yourself.
646 @end defmac
647
648 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
649 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
650 any target-specific headers.
651 @end deftypevar
652
653 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
654 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
655 Its default setting is 0.
656 @end deftypevr
657
658 @cindex optional hardware or system features
659 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
660
661 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
662 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
663 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
664 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
665 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
666 definition does nothing but return true.
667
668 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
669 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
670 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
671 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
672 via attributes).
673 @end deftypefn
674
675 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
676 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
677 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
678 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
679 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
680 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
681 default definition does nothing but return false.
682
683 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
684 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
685 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
686 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
687 @end deftypefn
688
689 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
690
691 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
692
693 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
694
695 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
696
697 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
698
699 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
700
701 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
702 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
703 but is only used in the C
704 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
705 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
706 frontends.
707 @end defmac
708
709 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
710 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
711 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
712 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
713 options are processed once
714 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
715 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
716 options passed explicitly.
717
718 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
719 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
720 @code{optimize} attribute.
721 @end deftypevr
722
723 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
724
725 @hook TARGET_OPTION_DEFAULT_PARAMS
726
727 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
728 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
729 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
730 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
731 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
732 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
733
734 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
735 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
736 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
737 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
738 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
739 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
740 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
741
742 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
743 is 0.
744 @end defmac
745
746 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
747
748 @node Per-Function Data
749 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
750 @cindex per-function data
751 @cindex data structures
752
753 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
754 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
755 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
756 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
757 when another one comes along.
758
759 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
760 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
761 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
762 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
763 to their own specific data.
764
765 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
766 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
767 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
768 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
769
770 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
771 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
772 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
773 function, for level 0.
774
775 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
776 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
777 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
778 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
779 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
780 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
781 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
782 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
783 longer supported.
784
785 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
786 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
787 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
788 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
789 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
790 @end defmac
791
792 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
793 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
794 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
795 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
796 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
797 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
798
799 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
800 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
801 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
802 @end deftypevar
803
804 @node Storage Layout
805 @section Storage Layout
806 @cindex storage layout
807
808 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
809 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
810 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
811 @xref{Run-time Target}.
812
813 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
814 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
815 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
816 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
817 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
818 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
819 macro need not be a constant.
820
821 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
822 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
823 @end defmac
824
825 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
826 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
827 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
828 @end defmac
829
830 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
831 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
832 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
833 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
834 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
835 macro need not be a constant.
836 @end defmac
837
838 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
839 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
840 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
841 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
842 the order of words in memory.
843 @end defmac
844
845 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
846 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
847 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
848 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
849 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
850
851 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
852 multi-word integers.
853 @end defmac
854
855 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
856 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
857 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
858 @end defmac
859
860 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
861 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
862 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
863 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
864 @end defmac
865
866 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
867 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
868 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
869 @end defmac
870
871 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
872 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
873 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
874 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
875 @end defmac
876
877 @defmac POINTER_SIZE
878 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
879 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
880 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
881 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
882 @end defmac
883
884 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
885 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
886 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
887 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
888 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
889 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
890 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
891
892 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
893 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
894 @end defmac
895
896 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
897 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
898 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
899 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
900 scalar type.
901
902 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
903 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
904 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
905 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
906 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
907 counterparts.
908
909 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
910 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
911 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
912 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
913 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
914 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
915
916 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
917 @end defmac
918
919 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
920
921 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
922 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
923 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
924 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
925 size of an integer.
926 @end defmac
927
928 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
929 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
930 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
931 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
932 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
933 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
934 @end defmac
935
936 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
937 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
938 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
939 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
940 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
941 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
942 @end defmac
943
944 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
945 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
946 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
947 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
948 @end defmac
949
950 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
951 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
952 @end defmac
953
954 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
955 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
956 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
957 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
958 @end defmac
959
960 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
961 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
962 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
963 @end defmac
964
965 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
966 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
967 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
968 @end defmac
969
970 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
971 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
972 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
973 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
974 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
975 @end defmac
976
977 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
978 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
979 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
980 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
981 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
982 @end defmac
983
984 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
985 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
986 alignment computed in the usual way (including applying of
987 @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
988 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
989 field alignment has not been set by the
990 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
991 @end defmac
992
993 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
994 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
995 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
996
997 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
998
999 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1000 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1001 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1002 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1003 @end defmac
1004
1005 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1006 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1007 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1008 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
1009 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1010
1011 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1012 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1013 a 32-bit host e.g. @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1014 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1015 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1016 @end defmac
1017
1018 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1019 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1020 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1021 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1022 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1023
1024 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1025
1026 @findex strcpy
1027 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1028 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1029 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1030 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1031 @end defmac
1032
1033 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1034 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1035 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1036 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1037 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1038
1039 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1040 @end defmac
1041
1042 @defmac CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
1043 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
1044 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
1045 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
1046 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1047 align the object.
1048
1049 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1050
1051 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
1052 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1053 constants can be done inline.
1054 @end defmac
1055
1056 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1057 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1058 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1059 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1060 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1061
1062 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1063
1064 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1065 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1066
1067 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1068 @end defmac
1069
1070 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1071
1072 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1073 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1074 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1075 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1076 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1077 align the slot.
1078
1079 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1080 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1081 be used.
1082
1083 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1084 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1085
1086 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1087 @end defmac
1088
1089 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1090 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1091 variable @var{decl}.
1092
1093 If this macro is not defined, then
1094 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1095 is used.
1096
1097 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1098 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1099
1100 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1101 @end defmac
1102
1103 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1104 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1105 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1106 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1107
1108 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1109 @end defmac
1110
1111 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1112 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1113 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1114
1115 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1116 @end defmac
1117
1118 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1119 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1120 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1121
1122 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1123 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1124 @end defmac
1125
1126 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1127 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1128 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1129 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1130 @end defmac
1131
1132 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1133 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1134 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1135
1136 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1137 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1138 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1139 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1140 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1141
1142 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1143 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1144 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1145 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1146
1147 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1148 structure.
1149
1150 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1151 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1152
1153 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1154 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1155 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1156 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1157
1158 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1159 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1160 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1161
1162 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1163 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1164 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1165
1166 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1167 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1168 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1169
1170 @smallexample
1171 struct foo1
1172 @{
1173 char x;
1174 char :0;
1175 char y;
1176 @};
1177
1178 struct foo2
1179 @{
1180 char x;
1181 int :0;
1182 char y;
1183 @};
1184
1185 main ()
1186 @{
1187 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1188 sizeof (struct foo1));
1189 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1190 sizeof (struct foo2));
1191 exit (0);
1192 @}
1193 @end smallexample
1194
1195 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1196 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1197 @end defmac
1198
1199 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1200 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1201 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1202 @end defmac
1203
1204 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1205
1206 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1207
1208 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1209
1210 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1211 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1212 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1213 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1214 @var{specified}.
1215
1216 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1217 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1218 @end defmac
1219
1220 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1221 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1222 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1223 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1224 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1225 (DImode)} is assumed.
1226 @end defmac
1227
1228 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1229 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1230 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1231 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1232 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1233 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1234 having its mode specified.
1235
1236 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1237 would most commonly define this macro if the
1238 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1239 64-bit mode.
1240 @end defmac
1241
1242 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1243 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1244 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1245 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1246
1247 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1248 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1249 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1250 @end defmac
1251
1252 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1253
1254 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1255
1256 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1257
1258 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1259
1260 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1261
1262 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1263
1264 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1265
1266 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1267
1268 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1269
1270 @node Type Layout
1271 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1272
1273 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1274 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1275 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1276 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1277
1278 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1279 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1280 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1281 @end defmac
1282
1283 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1284 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1285 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1286 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1287 unit.)
1288 @end defmac
1289
1290 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1291 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1292 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1293 @end defmac
1294
1295 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1296 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1297 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1298 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1299 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1300 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1301 @end defmac
1302
1303 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1304 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1305 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1306 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1307 macro must be at least 64.
1308 @end defmac
1309
1310 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1311 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1312 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1313 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1314 @end defmac
1315
1316 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1317 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1318 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1319 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1320 @end defmac
1321
1322 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1323 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1324 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1325 @end defmac
1326
1327 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1328 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1329 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1330 words.
1331 @end defmac
1332
1333 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1334 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1335 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1336 words.
1337 @end defmac
1338
1339 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1340 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1341 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1342 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1343 @end defmac
1344
1345 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1346 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1347 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1348 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1349 @end defmac
1350
1351 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1352 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1353 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1354 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1355 @end defmac
1356
1357 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1358 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1359 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1360 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1361 @end defmac
1362
1363 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1364 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1365 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1366 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1367 @end defmac
1368
1369 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1370 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1371 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1372 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1373 @end defmac
1374
1375 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1376 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1377 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1378 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1379 @end defmac
1380
1381 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1382 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1383 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1384 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1385 @end defmac
1386
1387 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1388 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1389 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1390 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1391 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1392 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1393 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1394 @end defmac
1395
1396 @defmac TARGET_FLT_EVAL_METHOD
1397 A C expression for the value for @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} in @file{float.h},
1398 assuming, if applicable, that the floating-point control word is in its
1399 default state. If you do not define this macro the value of
1400 @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} will be zero.
1401 @end defmac
1402
1403 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1404 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1405 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1406 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1407 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1408 is the default.
1409 @end defmac
1410
1411 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1412 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1413 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1414 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1415 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1416 @end defmac
1417
1418 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1419
1420 @defmac SIZE_TYPE
1421 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1422 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1423 contents of the string.
1424
1425 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1426 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1427 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1428 of the data type names defined in the function
1429 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.c}.
1430 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1431 compiler to crash on startup.
1432
1433 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1434 int"}.
1435 @end defmac
1436
1437 @defmac SIZETYPE
1438 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1439 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1440 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1441 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1442 is extracted.
1443
1444 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1445
1446 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1447 @end defmac
1448
1449 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1450 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1451 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1452 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1453 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1454
1455 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1456 @end defmac
1457
1458 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE
1459 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1460 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1461 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1462 information.
1463
1464 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1465 @end defmac
1466
1467 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1468 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1469 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1470 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1471 @end defmac
1472
1473 @defmac WINT_TYPE
1474 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1475 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1476 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1477 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1478 information.
1479
1480 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1481 @end defmac
1482
1483 @defmac INTMAX_TYPE
1484 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1485 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1486 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1487 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1488
1489 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1490 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1491 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1492 @end defmac
1493
1494 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1495 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1496 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1497 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1498 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1499
1500 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1501 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1502 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1503 int}.
1504 @end defmac
1505
1506 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1507 @defmacx INT8_TYPE
1508 @defmacx INT16_TYPE
1509 @defmacx INT32_TYPE
1510 @defmacx INT64_TYPE
1511 @defmacx UINT8_TYPE
1512 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1513 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1514 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1515 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1516 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1517 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1518 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1519 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1520 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1521 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1522 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1523 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1524 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1525 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1526 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1527 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1528 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1529 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1530 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1531 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1532 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1533 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1534 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1535 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1536 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1537 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1538 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1539 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1540 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1541 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1542 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1543
1544 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1545 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1546 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1547 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1548 these macros are null pointers.
1549 @end defmac
1550
1551 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1552 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1553 that looks like:
1554
1555 @smallexample
1556 struct @{
1557 union @{
1558 void (*fn)();
1559 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1560 @};
1561 ptrdiff_t delta;
1562 @};
1563 @end smallexample
1564
1565 @noindent
1566 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1567 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1568 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1569 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1570 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1571 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1572 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1573 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1574
1575 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1576 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1577 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1578 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1579 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1580 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1581 architecture, you should define this macro to
1582 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1583
1584 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1585 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1586 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1587 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1588 @end defmac
1589
1590 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1591 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1592 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1593 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1594 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1595 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1596 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1597
1598 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1599 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1600 @end defmac
1601
1602 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1603 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1604 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1605 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1606 when special alignment is necessary. */
1607 @end defmac
1608
1609 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1610 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1611 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1612 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1613 of words in each data entry.
1614 @end defmac
1615
1616 @node Registers
1617 @section Register Usage
1618 @cindex register usage
1619
1620 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1621 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1622
1623 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1624 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1625 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1626 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1627 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1628
1629 @menu
1630 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1631 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1632 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1633 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1634 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1635 @end menu
1636
1637 @node Register Basics
1638 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1639
1640 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1641 Registers have various characteristics.
1642
1643 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1644 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1645 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1646 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1647 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1648 @end defmac
1649
1650 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1651 @cindex fixed register
1652 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1653 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1654 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1655 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1656 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1657 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1658 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1659
1660 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1661 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1662 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1663
1664 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1665 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1666 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1667 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1668 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1669 @end defmac
1670
1671 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1672 @cindex call-used register
1673 @cindex call-clobbered register
1674 @cindex call-saved register
1675 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1676 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1677 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1678 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1679 function calls.
1680
1681 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1682 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1683 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1684 @end defmac
1685
1686 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1687 @cindex call-used register
1688 @cindex call-clobbered register
1689 @cindex call-saved register
1690 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1691 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1692 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1693 This macro is optional. If not specified, it defaults to the value
1694 of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}.
1695 @end defmac
1696
1697 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1698 @cindex call-used register
1699 @cindex call-clobbered register
1700 @cindex call-saved register
1701 A C expression that is nonzero if it is not permissible to store a
1702 value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1703 call without some part of it being clobbered. For most machines this
1704 macro need not be defined. It is only required for machines that do not
1705 preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1706 @end defmac
1707
1708 @findex fixed_regs
1709 @findex call_used_regs
1710 @findex global_regs
1711 @findex reg_names
1712 @findex reg_class_contents
1713 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1714
1715 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1716 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1717 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1718 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1719 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1720 outbound register.
1721 @end defmac
1722
1723 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1724 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1725 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1726 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1727 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1728 register.
1729 @end defmac
1730
1731 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1732 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1733 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1734 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1735 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1736 gotos.
1737 @end defmac
1738
1739 @defmac PC_REGNUM
1740 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1741 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1742 @end defmac
1743
1744 @node Allocation Order
1745 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1746 @cindex order of register allocation
1747 @cindex register allocation order
1748
1749 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1750 Registers are allocated in order.
1751
1752 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1753 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1754 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1755 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1756
1757 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1758 (all else being equal).
1759
1760 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1761 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1762 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1763 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1764 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1765 @end defmac
1766
1767 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1768 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1769 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1770
1771 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1772 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1773 register; and so on.
1774
1775 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1776 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1777
1778 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1779 @end defmac
1780
1781 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1782 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1783 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1784 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1785 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1786 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1787 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1788 @end defmac
1789
1790 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1791 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1792 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1793 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1794 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1795 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1796 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1797 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1798
1799 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1800 @end defmac
1801
1802 @node Values in Registers
1803 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1804
1805 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1806 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1807 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1808
1809 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1810 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1811 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1812 @var{mode}. This macro must never return zero, even if a register
1813 cannot hold the requested mode - indicate that with HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1814 and/or CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS instead.
1815
1816 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1817 definition of this macro is
1818
1819 @smallexample
1820 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1821 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1822 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
1823 @end smallexample
1824 @end defmac
1825
1826 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1827 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1828 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1829 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1830 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1831 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1832 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1833
1834 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1835 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1836 nonzero.
1837
1838 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1839 @code{subreg_get_info}
1840 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1841 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1842 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1843 registers and so not be representable.
1844 @end defmac
1845
1846 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1847 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1848 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1849 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1850 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1851 @end defmac
1852
1853 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1854 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1855 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1856 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1857 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1858 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1859 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1860 @end defmac
1861
1862 @defmac HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1863 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1864 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1865 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1866 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1867
1868 @smallexample
1869 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1870 @end smallexample
1871
1872 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1873 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1874
1875 @cindex register pairs
1876 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1877 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1878 odd register numbers for such modes.
1879
1880 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1881 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1882 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1883 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1884
1885 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1886 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1887 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1888 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1889 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1890 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1891 to be tieable.
1892
1893 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1894 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1895 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1896 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1897 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1898 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1899
1900 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1901 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1902 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1903 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1904 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1905 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1906 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1907 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1908 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1909
1910 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1911 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1912 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1913 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1914 constraints for those instructions.
1915
1916 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1917 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1918 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1919 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1920 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1921 @end defmac
1922
1923 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1924 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1925 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1926
1927 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1928 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1929 handler.
1930
1931 The default is always nonzero.
1932 @end defmac
1933
1934 @defmac MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
1935 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
1936 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
1937
1938 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
1939 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1940 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1941 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1942 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
1943 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
1944
1945 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1946 possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
1947 allocation.
1948 @end defmac
1949
1950 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
1951
1952 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1953 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1954 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1955 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1956 @end defmac
1957
1958 @node Leaf Functions
1959 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1960
1961 @cindex leaf functions
1962 @cindex functions, leaf
1963 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1964 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1965 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1966 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1967 normally arrive.
1968
1969 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1970 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1971 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1972 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1973 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1974 functions''.
1975
1976 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1977 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1978 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1979 accomplish this.
1980
1981 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
1982 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1983 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1984 function treatment.
1985
1986 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1987 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1988 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1989 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1990 in this vector.
1991
1992 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1993 the treatment of leaf functions.
1994 @end defmac
1995
1996 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1997 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1998 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1999
2000 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
2001 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
2002 will cause the compiler to abort.
2003
2004 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
2005 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
2006 this.
2007 @end defmac
2008
2009 @findex current_function_is_leaf
2010 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
2011 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
2012 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
2013 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
2014 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
2015 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
2016 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
2017 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
2018 functions which only use leaf registers.
2019 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
2020 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
2021 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
2022 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
2023 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
2024
2025 @node Stack Registers
2026 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
2027
2028 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
2029 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
2030 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
2031 stack.
2032
2033 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
2034 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
2035 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
2036 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
2037 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
2038 @file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
2039 with it, as well as defining these macros.
2040
2041 @defmac STACK_REGS
2042 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
2043 @end defmac
2044
2045 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
2046 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
2047 the machine has any stack-like registers.
2048 @end defmac
2049
2050 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
2051 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
2052 of the stack.
2053 @end defmac
2054
2055 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
2056 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
2057 the stack.
2058 @end defmac
2059
2060 @node Register Classes
2061 @section Register Classes
2062 @cindex register class definitions
2063 @cindex class definitions, register
2064
2065 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
2066 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
2067 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
2068 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
2069
2070 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
2071 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
2072 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
2073
2074 @findex ALL_REGS
2075 @findex NO_REGS
2076 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
2077 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
2078 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
2079 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
2080
2081 @findex GENERAL_REGS
2082 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
2083 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
2084 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
2085 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
2086 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
2087
2088 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
2089 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
2090
2091 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
2092 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
2093 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
2094 them in operand constraints.
2095
2096 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
2097 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
2098 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
2099 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2100 (@pxref{Costs}).
2101
2102 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2103 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2104 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2105 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2106 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2107 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2108 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2109
2110 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2111 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2112 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2113 in their union.
2114
2115 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2116 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2117 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2118 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2119 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2120
2121 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2122 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2123 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2124 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2125 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2126 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2127 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2128 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2129 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2130
2131 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2132 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2133 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2134 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2135 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2136 tells how many classes there are.
2137
2138 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2139 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2140 in many of the tables described below.
2141 @end deftp
2142
2143 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2144 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2145
2146 @smallexample
2147 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2148 @end smallexample
2149 @end defmac
2150
2151 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2152 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2153 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2154 @end defmac
2155
2156 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2157 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2158 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2159 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2160 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2161
2162 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2163 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2164 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2165 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2166 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2167 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2168 so on.
2169 @end defmac
2170
2171 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2172 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2173 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2174 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2175 register.
2176 @end defmac
2177
2178 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2179 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2180 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2181 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2182 @end defmac
2183
2184 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2185 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2186 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2187 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2188 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2189 @end defmac
2190
2191 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2192 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2193 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2194 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2195 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2196 @end defmac
2197
2198 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2199 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2200 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2201 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2202 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2203 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2204 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2205 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2206 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2207 @end defmac
2208
2209 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2210 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2211 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2212 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2213 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2214 @end defmac
2215
2216 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2217 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2218 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2219 @end defmac
2220
2221 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2222 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2223 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2224 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2225 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2226 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2227 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2228 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2229 @code{address_operand}.
2230 @end defmac
2231
2232 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2233 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2234 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2235 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2236 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2237 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2238 than other base register uses.
2239
2240 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2241 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2242 @end defmac
2243
2244 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2245 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2246 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2247 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2248 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2249 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2250 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2251 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2252 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2253 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2254 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2255 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2256 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2257 @end defmac
2258
2259 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2260 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2261 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2262 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2263 allocated such a hard register.
2264
2265 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2266 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2267 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2268 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2269 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2270 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2271 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2272 only if neither labeling works.
2273 @end defmac
2274
2275 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2276
2277 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2278
2279 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2280 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2281 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2282 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2283 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2284 safe:
2285
2286 @smallexample
2287 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2288 @end smallexample
2289
2290 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2291 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2292 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2293 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2294 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2295
2296 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2297 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2298 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2299 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2300 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2301 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2302 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2303 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant can't be loaded
2304 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2305 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2306 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2307
2308 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2309 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2310 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2311 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2312 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2313 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2314 @end defmac
2315
2316 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2317
2318 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2319 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2320 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2321 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2322 ordinarily be used.
2323
2324 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2325 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
2326
2327 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2328 smaller class.
2329
2330 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2331 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2332 @end defmac
2333
2334 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2335
2336 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2337 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2338 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2339 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2340 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2341
2342 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2343 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2344 reload phase that it may
2345 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2346 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2347 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2348 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2349 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2350 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2351
2352 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2353 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2354 was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2355 class required. If the
2356 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2357 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2358 macros identically.
2359
2360 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2361 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2362 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2363 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2364 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2365
2366 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2367 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2368 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2369 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2370 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2371 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2372 register.
2373
2374 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2375 register that
2376 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2377 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2378 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2379 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2380 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2381
2382 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2383 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2384 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2385 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2386
2387 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2388 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2389 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2390 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2391 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2392 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2393 general registers.
2394 @end defmac
2395
2396 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
2397 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
2398 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
2399 those machines to be a C expression that is nonzero if objects of mode
2400 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
2401 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
2402 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
2403
2404 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
2405 @end defmac
2406
2407 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2408 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2409 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2410 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2411 defined by this macro.
2412
2413 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2414 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2415 @end defmac
2416
2417 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
2418 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
2419 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
2420 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
2421 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
2422 same as that of @var{mode}.
2423
2424 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
2425 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
2426 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2427 registers.
2428
2429 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2430 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2431 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2432 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2433 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2434 details.
2435
2436 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2437 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2438 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2439 @end defmac
2440
2441 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2442
2443 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2444
2445 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2446 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2447 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2448
2449 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2450 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2451 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2452 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2453
2454 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2455 in the reload pass.
2456 @end defmac
2457
2458 @defmac CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS (@var{from}, @var{to}, @var{class})
2459 If defined, a C expression that returns nonzero for a @var{class} for which
2460 a change from mode @var{from} to mode @var{to} is invalid.
2461
2462 For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2463 floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64 bits.
2464 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2465 does not store the low-order 32 bits, as would be the case for a normal
2466 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS}
2467 as below:
2468
2469 @smallexample
2470 #define CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS(FROM, TO, CLASS) \
2471 (GET_MODE_SIZE (FROM) != GET_MODE_SIZE (TO) \
2472 ? reg_classes_intersect_p (FLOAT_REGS, (CLASS)) : 0)
2473 @end smallexample
2474 @end defmac
2475
2476 @hook TARGET_LRA_P
2477
2478 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2479
2480 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2481
2482 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2483
2484 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2485
2486 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2487
2488 @node Stack and Calling
2489 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2490 @cindex calling conventions
2491
2492 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2493 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2494
2495 @menu
2496 * Frame Layout::
2497 * Exception Handling::
2498 * Stack Checking::
2499 * Frame Registers::
2500 * Elimination::
2501 * Stack Arguments::
2502 * Register Arguments::
2503 * Scalar Return::
2504 * Aggregate Return::
2505 * Caller Saves::
2506 * Function Entry::
2507 * Profiling::
2508 * Tail Calls::
2509 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2510 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2511 @end menu
2512
2513 @node Frame Layout
2514 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2515 @cindex stack frame layout
2516 @cindex frame layout
2517
2518 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2519 Here is the basic stack layout.
2520
2521 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2522 Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2523 pointer to a smaller address.
2524
2525 When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{}'', it means that the
2526 compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
2527 definition used does not matter.
2528 @end defmac
2529
2530 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2531 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2532 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2533 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2534
2535 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2536 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2537 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2538 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2539 space for the next item on the stack.
2540
2541 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2542 defined, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2543 which is often wrong.
2544 @end defmac
2545
2546 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2547 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2548 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2549 @end defmac
2550
2551 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2552 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2553 addresses on the stack.
2554 @end defmac
2555
2556 @defmac STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2557 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2558
2559 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2560 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2561 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2562 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2563 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2564 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2565 @end defmac
2566
2567 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2568 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2569 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2570
2571 On ports where @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2572 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2573 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2574 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2575 @end defmac
2576
2577 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2578 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2579 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2580 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2581
2582 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2583 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2584 @end defmac
2585
2586 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2587 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2588 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2589 function.
2590
2591 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2592 the first argument's address.
2593 @end defmac
2594
2595 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2596 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2597 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2598
2599 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2600 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2601 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2602 @end defmac
2603
2604 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2605 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2606 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2607 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2608 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2609 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2610 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2611 @end defmac
2612
2613 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2614 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2615 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2616 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2617 itself.
2618
2619 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2620 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2621 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2622 @end defmac
2623
2624 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2625 If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2626 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2627 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2628 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2629 define this macro.
2630 @end defmac
2631
2632 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2633
2634 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2635 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2636 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2637 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2638 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2639 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2640 @end defmac
2641
2642 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2643 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2644 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2645 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2646 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2647 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
2648
2649 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2650 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2651 determine the return address of other frames.
2652 @end defmac
2653
2654 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2655 Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
2656 from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
2657 @end defmac
2658
2659 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2660 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2661 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2662 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2663 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2664 the stack.
2665
2666 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2667 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2668
2669 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2670 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2671 @end defmac
2672
2673 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2674 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2675 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2676 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2677 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2678
2679 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2680 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2681 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2682 over time.
2683 @end defmac
2684
2685 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2686 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2687 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2688 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2689 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2690 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2691 @end defmac
2692
2693 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2694
2695 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2696 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2697 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2698 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2699 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2700 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2701
2702 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2703 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2704 @end defmac
2705
2706 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2707 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2708 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2709 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2710 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2711 during virtual register instantiation.
2712
2713 The default value for this macro is
2714 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2715 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2716 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2717 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2718 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2719
2720 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2721 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2722 DWARF 2.
2723 @end defmac
2724
2725 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2726 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2727 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2728 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2729 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2730
2731 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2732 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2733 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2734 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2735 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2736 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2737 should be defined.
2738 @end defmac
2739
2740 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2741 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2742 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2743 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2744 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2745 @end defmac
2746
2747 @node Exception Handling
2748 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2749 @cindex exception handling
2750
2751 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2752 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2753 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2754 @var{N} registers are usable.
2755
2756 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2757 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2758 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2759 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2760 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2761
2762 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2763 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2764 @end defmac
2765
2766 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2767 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2768 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2769 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2770 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2771
2772 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2773 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2774
2775 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2776 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2777 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2778 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2779 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2780 that provided by DWARF 2.
2781 @end defmac
2782
2783 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2784 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2785 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2786 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2787
2788 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2789 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2790 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2791 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2792 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2793 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2794 target call frame.
2795
2796 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2797 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2798 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2799
2800 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2801 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2802 @end defmac
2803
2804 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2805 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2806 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2807 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2808 using it to return to the exception handler.
2809 @end defmac
2810
2811 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2812 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2813 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2814 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2815 and so may be read-only.
2816
2817 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2818 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2819 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2820 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2821
2822 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2823 represented directly.
2824 @end defmac
2825
2826 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2827 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2828 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2829 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2830 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2831
2832 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2833 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2834 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2835 to be emitted.
2836 @end defmac
2837
2838 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2839 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2840 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2841 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2842 through signal frames.
2843
2844 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2845 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2846 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2847 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2848 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2849 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2850 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2851 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2852 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2853
2854 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2855 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2856 @end defmac
2857
2858 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2859 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2860 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2861 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2862
2863 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2864 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2865 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2866 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2867 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2868 be updated in @var{fs}.
2869 @end defmac
2870
2871 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2872 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2873 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2874 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2875 @end defmac
2876
2877 @node Stack Checking
2878 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2879
2880 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2881 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2882 three ways:
2883
2884 @enumerate
2885 @item
2886 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2887 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2888 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2889 other special processing.
2890
2891 @item
2892 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2893 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2894 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2895 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2896 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2897 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2898 approach below.
2899
2900 @item
2901 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2902 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2903 @end enumerate
2904
2905 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2906 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2907 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2908 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2909
2910 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2911 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2912 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2913 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2914 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2915 value of this macro is zero.
2916 @end defmac
2917
2918 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2919 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2920 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2921 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2922 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2923 @end defmac
2924
2925 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2926 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2927 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2928 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2929 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2930 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2931 @end defmac
2932
2933 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2934 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
2935 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
2936 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
2937 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
2938 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
2939 default value of this macro is zero.
2940 @end defmac
2941
2942 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2943 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
2944 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 75 words
2945 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
2946 8192 bytes with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for
2947 most machines.
2948 @end defmac
2949
2950 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2951 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
2952 in the opposite case.
2953
2954 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2955 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2956 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2957 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2958 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2959 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2960 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2961 @end defmac
2962
2963 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2964 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2965 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2966 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2967 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2968 use the default of four words.
2969 @end defmac
2970
2971 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2972 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2973 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2974 @option{-fstack-check}.
2975 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2976 normally not need to override that default.
2977 @end defmac
2978
2979 @need 2000
2980 @node Frame Registers
2981 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2982
2983 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2984 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2985
2986 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2987 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2988 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2989 the hardware determines which register this is.
2990 @end defmac
2991
2992 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2993 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2994 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2995 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2996 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2997 @end defmac
2998
2999 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3000 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
3001 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
3002 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
3003 between these two locations). On those machines, define
3004 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
3005 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
3006 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
3007 used for the frame pointer.
3008
3009 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
3010 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
3011 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
3012 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
3013 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
3014 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
3015 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3016
3017 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
3018 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3019 @end defmac
3020
3021 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
3022 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
3023 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
3024 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
3025 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
3026 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
3027 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
3028 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
3029 (@pxref{Elimination}).
3030 @end defmac
3031
3032 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
3033 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3034 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
3035 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3036 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3037 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3038 @end defmac
3039
3040 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
3041 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3042 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
3043 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
3044 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3045 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3046 @end defmac
3047
3048 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
3049 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
3050 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
3051 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
3052 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
3053 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
3054 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
3055
3056 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
3057 address from the stack.
3058 @end defmac
3059
3060 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
3061 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
3062 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
3063 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
3064 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
3065 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
3066 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
3067 not be defined.
3068
3069 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
3070
3071 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
3072 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
3073 @end defmac
3074
3075 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
3076
3077 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3078 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
3079 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
3080 DWARF2 exception handling.
3081
3082 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
3083 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
3084 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
3085 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
3086 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
3087 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
3088 registers that are not call-saved.
3089
3090 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3091 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
3092 @end defmac
3093
3094 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3095
3096 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
3097 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
3098
3099 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3100 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
3101 @end defmac
3102
3103 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
3104
3105 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3106 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
3107 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
3108 column number to use instead.
3109
3110 See the PowerPC's SPE target for an example.
3111 @end defmac
3112
3113 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
3114
3115 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3116 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
3117 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
3118 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
3119 @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
3120
3121 @end defmac
3122
3123 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
3124
3125 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
3126 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
3127 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
3128 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
3129 return @code{@var{regno}}.
3130
3131 @end defmac
3132
3133 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3134
3135 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
3136 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
3137 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
3138 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
3139
3140 @end defmac
3141
3142 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3143
3144 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
3145 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
3146 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3147 defined and 0 otherwise.
3148
3149 @end defmac
3150
3151 @node Elimination
3152 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3153
3154 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3155 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3156
3157 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3158
3159 @findex get_frame_size
3160 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
3161 A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
3162 between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
3163 the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
3164 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3165 registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3166
3167 If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
3168 need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
3169 @code{TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} always returns true; in that
3170 case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
3171 @end defmac
3172
3173 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3174 If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
3175 eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
3176 defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
3177 references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
3178
3179 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3180 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3181
3182 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3183 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3184 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3185 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3186 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3187
3188 In this case, you might specify:
3189 @smallexample
3190 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3191 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3192 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3193 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3194 @end smallexample
3195
3196 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3197 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3198 @end defmac
3199
3200 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3201
3202 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3203 This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
3204 specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
3205 registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
3206 defined.
3207 @end defmac
3208
3209 @node Stack Arguments
3210 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3211 @cindex arguments on stack
3212 @cindex stack arguments
3213
3214 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3215 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3216 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3217
3218 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3219
3220 @defmac PUSH_ARGS
3221 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3222 outgoing arguments.
3223 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3224 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3225 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3226 it. When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3227 @end defmac
3228
3229 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3230 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3231 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3232 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3233 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3234 @end defmac
3235
3236 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3237 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3238 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3239
3240 On some machines, the definition
3241
3242 @smallexample
3243 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3244 @end smallexample
3245
3246 @noindent
3247 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3248 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3249 alignment. Then the definition should be
3250
3251 @smallexample
3252 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3253 @end smallexample
3254
3255 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3256 @end defmac
3257
3258 @findex outgoing_args_size
3259 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3260 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3261 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3262 will be computed and placed into
3263 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3264 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3265 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3266
3267 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3268 is not proper.
3269 @end defmac
3270
3271 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3272 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3273 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3274 registers.
3275
3276 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3277 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3278 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3279 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3280 of the function.
3281
3282 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3283 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3284 which.
3285 @end defmac
3286 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3287 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3288
3289 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3290 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3291 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3292 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3293 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3294 @end defmac
3295
3296 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3297 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3298 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3299 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3300 if the function called is a library function.
3301
3302 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3303 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3304 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3305 @end defmac
3306
3307 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3308 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3309 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3310 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3311 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3312
3313 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3314 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3315 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3316 stack in its natural location.
3317 @end defmac
3318
3319 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3320
3321 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3322 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3323 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3324 when compiling a function call.
3325
3326 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3327 have been accumulated.
3328
3329 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3330 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3331 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3332 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3333 appropriate.
3334 @end defmac
3335
3336 @node Register Arguments
3337 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3338 @cindex arguments in registers
3339 @cindex registers arguments
3340
3341 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3342 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3343 the stack.
3344
3345 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3346
3347 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3348
3349 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3350
3351 @hook TARGET_USE_PSEUDO_PIC_REG
3352
3353 @hook TARGET_INIT_PIC_REG
3354
3355 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3356
3357 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3358
3359 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3360
3361 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3362 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3363 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3364 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3365 of bytes of argument so far.
3366
3367 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3368 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3369 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3370 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3371 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3372 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3373 @end defmac
3374
3375 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3376 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3377 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3378 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3379 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3380 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3381 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3382 @end defmac
3383
3384 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3385 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3386 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3387 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3388 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3389 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3390 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3391 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3392 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3393 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3394 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3395 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3396 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3397
3398 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3399 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3400 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3401 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3402 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3403 never both of them at once.
3404 @end defmac
3405
3406 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3407 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3408 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3409 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3410 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3411 0)} is used instead.
3412 @end defmac
3413
3414 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3415 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3416 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3417 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3418
3419 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3420 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3421 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3422 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3423 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3424 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3425 @end defmac
3426
3427 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3428
3429 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3430 If defined, a C expression that is the number of bytes to add to the
3431 offset of the argument passed in memory. This is needed for the SPU,
3432 which passes @code{char} and @code{short} arguments in the preferred
3433 slot that is in the middle of the quad word instead of starting at the
3434 top.
3435 @end defmac
3436
3437 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3438 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
3439 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
3440 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
3441 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
3442
3443 The @emph{amount} of padding is not controlled by this macro, but by the
3444 target hook @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY}. It is
3445 always just enough to reach the next multiple of that boundary.
3446
3447 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
3448 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
3449 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
3450 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
3451 @end defmac
3452
3453 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3454 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3455 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3456 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3457 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3458 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3459 @end defmac
3460
3461 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3462 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3463 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3464 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3465 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3466 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3467 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3468 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3469 required.
3470 @end defmac
3471
3472 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3473
3474 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3475
3476 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3477 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3478 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3479 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3480 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3481 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3482 stack.
3483 @end defmac
3484
3485 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3486
3487 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3488
3489 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3490
3491 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3492
3493 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3494
3495 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3496
3497 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3498
3499 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3500
3501 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3502
3503 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3504
3505 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3506
3507 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_FLOATING_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3508
3509 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3510
3511 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
3512
3513 @node Scalar Return
3514 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3515 @cindex return values in registers
3516 @cindex values, returned by functions
3517 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3518
3519 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3520 values---values that can fit in registers.
3521
3522 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3523
3524 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3525 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3526 a new target instead.
3527 @end defmac
3528
3529 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3530 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3531 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3532
3533 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3534 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3535 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3536 compiled.
3537 @end defmac
3538
3539 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3540
3541 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3542 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3543 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3544
3545 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3546 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3547 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3548 suffices:
3549
3550 @smallexample
3551 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3552 @end smallexample
3553
3554 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3555 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3556 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3557
3558 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3559 for a new target instead.
3560 @end defmac
3561
3562 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3563
3564 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3565 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3566 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3567 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3568 @end defmac
3569
3570 @hook TARGET_OMIT_STRUCT_RETURN_REG
3571
3572 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3573
3574 @node Aggregate Return
3575 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3576 @cindex aggregates as return values
3577 @cindex large return values
3578 @cindex returning aggregate values
3579 @cindex structure value address
3580
3581 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3582 cases), the value is not returned according to
3583 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3584 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3585 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3586 address}.
3587
3588 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3589 memory.
3590
3591 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3592
3593 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3594 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3595 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3596 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3597 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3598 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3599 target hook.
3600
3601 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3602 @end defmac
3603
3604 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3605
3606 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3607 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3608 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3609 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3610
3611 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3612 pass an address to the subroutine.
3613
3614 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3615 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3616 @end defmac
3617
3618 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3619
3620 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3621
3622 @node Caller Saves
3623 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3624
3625 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3626 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3627 must live across calls.
3628
3629 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3630 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3631 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3632 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3633 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3634 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3635 @end defmac
3636
3637 @node Function Entry
3638 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3639 @cindex function entry and exit
3640 @cindex prologue
3641 @cindex epilogue
3642
3643 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3644 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3645
3646 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3647
3648 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3649
3650 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3651
3652 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3653
3654 @itemize @bullet
3655 @item
3656 @findex pretend_args_size
3657 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3658 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3659 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3660 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3661 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3662 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3663 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3664 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3665 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3666 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3667
3668 @item
3669 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3670 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3671 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3672 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3673 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3674 a save area.
3675
3676 @item
3677 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3678 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3679 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3680 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3681
3682 @item
3683 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3684 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3685 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3686 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3687 @end itemize
3688
3689 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3690 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3691 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3692 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3693 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3694 default is 0.
3695
3696 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3697 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3698 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3699 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3700 @end defmac
3701
3702 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3703 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3704 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3705 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3706 @end defmac
3707
3708 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3709 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3710 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3711 on entry to an exception edge.
3712 @end defmac
3713
3714 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3715
3716 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3717
3718 @node Profiling
3719 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3720 @cindex profiling, code generation
3721
3722 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3723
3724 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3725 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3726 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3727
3728 @findex mcount
3729 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3730 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3731 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3732 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3733
3734 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3735 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3736 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3737 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3738 @end defmac
3739
3740 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3741 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3742 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3743 not support profiling.
3744 @end defmac
3745
3746 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3747 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3748 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3749 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3750 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3751 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3752 @end defmac
3753
3754 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3755 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3756 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3757 @end defmac
3758
3759 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3760
3761 @node Tail Calls
3762 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3763 @cindex tail calls
3764
3765 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3766
3767 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3768
3769 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3770
3771 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3772
3773 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3774 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3775 @cindex stack smashing protection
3776
3777 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3778
3779 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3780
3781 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3782
3783 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3784 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3785 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3786
3787 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3788
3789 @node Varargs
3790 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3791 @cindex varargs implementation
3792
3793 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3794 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3795 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3796 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3797 conditionals to include it.
3798
3799 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3800 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3801 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3802 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3803 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3804 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3805
3806 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3807 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3808 below.
3809
3810 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3811 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3812 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3813 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3814 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3815
3816 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3817 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3818 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3819 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3820
3821 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3822 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3823 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3824 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3825 to use them for its own purposes.
3826 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3827 @c 10feb93
3828 @end defmac
3829
3830 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3831 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3832 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3833 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3834 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3835 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3836 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3837 of the current function.
3838 @end defmac
3839
3840 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3841 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3842 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3843 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3844 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3845 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3846
3847 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3848 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3849 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3850
3851 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3852 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3853 @end defmac
3854
3855 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3856
3857 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3858
3859 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3860
3861 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3862
3863 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3864
3865 @hook TARGET_LOAD_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3866
3867 @hook TARGET_STORE_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3868
3869 @hook TARGET_LOAD_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3870
3871 @hook TARGET_STORE_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3872
3873 @hook TARGET_CHKP_FUNCTION_VALUE_BOUNDS
3874
3875 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARG_BOUNDS
3876
3877 @node Trampolines
3878 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3879 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3880 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3881
3882 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3883 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3884 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3885 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3886 trampoline.
3887
3888 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3889 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3890 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3891 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3892 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3893 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3894 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3895 operands.
3896
3897 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3898 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3899 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3900 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3901 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3902 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3903 separately.
3904
3905 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3906
3907 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3908 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3909 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3910 @end defmac
3911
3912 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3913 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3914 @end defmac
3915
3916 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3917 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3918
3919 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3920 is used for aligning trampolines.
3921 @end defmac
3922
3923 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3924
3925 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3926
3927 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3928 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3929 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3930 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3931
3932 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3933 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3934 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3935 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3936 latter makes initialization faster.
3937
3938 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3939 the following macro.
3940
3941 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3942 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3943 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3944 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
3945 @var{end} are both pointer expressions.
3946 @end defmac
3947
3948 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3949 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3950 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3951 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3952 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3953
3954 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3955 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3956 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3957 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
3958 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3959
3960 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3961 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3962 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3963 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3964 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3965 special assembler code.
3966 @end defmac
3967
3968 @node Library Calls
3969 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3970 @cindex library subroutine names
3971 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3972
3973 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3974 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3975
3976 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
3977 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
3978 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
3979 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
3980 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
3981 @end defmac
3982
3983 @findex set_optab_libfunc
3984 @findex init_one_libfunc
3985 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
3986
3987 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
3988
3989 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
3990 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
3991 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
3992 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
3993 return a tristate.
3994
3995 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
3996 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
3997 don't need to define this macro.
3998 @end defmac
3999
4000 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
4001 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
4002 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
4003 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
4004 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
4005 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
4006 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
4007 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
4008 @end defmac
4009
4010 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
4011 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
4012 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4013 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
4014 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4015 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
4016 @end defmac
4017
4018 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4019 @findex matherr
4020 @defmac TARGET_EDOM
4021 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4022 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
4023 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4024 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4025 system.
4026
4027 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4028 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4029 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4030 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4031 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4032 @end defmac
4033
4034 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4035 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4036 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4037 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4038 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4039 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4040 @end defmac
4041
4042 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
4043
4044 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4045 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
4046 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
4047 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
4048 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
4049 the NeXT runtime installed.
4050
4051 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
4052 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
4053 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4054
4055 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
4056 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
4057 @end defmac
4058
4059 @node Addressing Modes
4060 @section Addressing Modes
4061 @cindex addressing modes
4062
4063 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4064 This is about addressing modes.
4065
4066 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4067 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4068 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4069 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4070 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4071 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4072 @end defmac
4073
4074 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4075 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4076 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4077 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4078 the size of the memory operand.
4079 @end defmac
4080
4081 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4082 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4083 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4084 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4085 @end defmac
4086
4087 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4088 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4089 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
4090 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
4091 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
4092 constant addresses are supported.
4093 @end defmac
4094
4095 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4096 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
4097 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
4098 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
4099 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
4100 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4101 @end defmac
4102
4103 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4104 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4105 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4106 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
4107 accept.
4108 @end defmac
4109
4110 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
4111
4112 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
4113 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
4114 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
4115 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
4116 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
4117 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
4118 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
4119 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
4120 @code{'m'} constraint.
4121 @end defmac
4122
4123 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
4124 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
4125 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
4126 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
4127 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
4128
4129 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4130 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4131
4132 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4133 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4134 @end defmac
4135
4136 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4137
4138 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4139 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4140 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4141 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4142 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4143 performance reasons.
4144
4145 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4146 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4147 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4148 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4149 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4150 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4151 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4152 be shared.
4153
4154 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4155 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4156 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4157 of reload internals.
4158
4159 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4160 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4161 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4162
4163 @findex push_reload
4164 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4165 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4166 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4167
4168 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4169 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4170 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4171 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4172 @code{push_reload}.
4173
4174 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4175 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4176 the address has become legitimate.
4177
4178 @findex copy_rtx
4179 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4180 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4181 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4182 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4183 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4184 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4185 @end defmac
4186
4187 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4188
4189 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4190
4191 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4192
4193 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4194
4195 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4196
4197 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4198
4199 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4200
4201 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4202
4203 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4204
4205 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4206
4207 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4208
4209 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST_OK
4210
4211 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION
4212
4213 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4214
4215 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4216
4217 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4218
4219 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_SIZES
4220
4221 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_INIT_COST
4222
4223 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_ADD_STMT_COST
4224
4225 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_FINISH_COST
4226
4227 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_DESTROY_COST_DATA
4228
4229 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_TM_LOAD
4230
4231 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_TM_STORE
4232
4233 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4234
4235 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4236
4237 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4238
4239 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4240
4241 @node Anchored Addresses
4242 @section Anchored Addresses
4243 @cindex anchored addresses
4244 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4245
4246 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4247 For example, if we have:
4248
4249 @smallexample
4250 static int a, b, c;
4251 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4252 @end smallexample
4253
4254 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4255 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4256 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4257 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4258 be something like:
4259
4260 @smallexample
4261 int foo (void)
4262 @{
4263 register int *xr = &x;
4264 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4265 @}
4266 @end smallexample
4267
4268 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4269 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4270
4271 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4272 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4273 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4274 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4275
4276 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4277
4278 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4279
4280 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4281
4282 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4283
4284 @node Condition Code
4285 @section Condition Code Status
4286 @cindex condition code status
4287
4288 The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
4289 two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
4290
4291 The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
4292 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
4293 clobber of the condition codes. The second is the condition code
4294 register representation, which provides better schedulability for
4295 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4296 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4297 most RISC machines.
4298
4299 The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
4300 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4301 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4302 arithmatic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4303 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4304 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4305
4306 These restrictions can prevent important
4307 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4308 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4309 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4310 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4311 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4312
4313 For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
4314 represent the condition code for new ports. If there is a specific
4315 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4316 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4317 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4318 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4319 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4320
4321 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4322 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4323 interested in most macros in this section.
4324
4325 @menu
4326 * CC0 Condition Codes:: Old style representation of condition codes.
4327 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4328 @end menu
4329
4330 @node CC0 Condition Codes
4331 @subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
4332 @findex cc0
4333
4334 @findex cc_status
4335 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4336 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4337 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4338 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4339 currently based, and several standard flags.
4340
4341 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4342 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4343 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4344
4345 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
4346 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4347 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4348
4349 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4350 @end defmac
4351
4352 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4353 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4354 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4355 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4356 define this macro to initialize it.
4357
4358 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4359 @end defmac
4360
4361 @defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4362 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4363 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4364 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4365 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4366 set @code{(cc0)}.
4367
4368 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4369
4370 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4371 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4372 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4373 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4374 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4375 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4376 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4377 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4378 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4379 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4380 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4381 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4382 condition code value.
4383
4384 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4385 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4386 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4387 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4388 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4389 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4390 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4391
4392 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4393 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4394 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4395 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4396 @end defmac
4397
4398 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4399 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4400 @findex CCmode
4401 @findex MODE_CC
4402
4403 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4404 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4405 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4406 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4407 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4408 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4409 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4410 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4411 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4412 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g. a signed or an
4413 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4414
4415 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4416 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4417 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4418 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4419 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4420 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4421 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4422
4423 @smallexample
4424 (define_insn ""
4425 [(set (reg:CC_NOOV 0)
4426 (compare:CC_NOOV
4427 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4428 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4429 (const_int 0)))]
4430 ""
4431 "@dots{}")
4432 @end smallexample
4433
4434 @noindent
4435 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CC_NOOVmode}
4436 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4437
4438 @smallexample
4439 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4440 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4441 ? ((OP == EQ || OP == NE) ? CCFPmode : CCFPEmode) \
4442 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4443 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG) \
4444 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4445 @end smallexample
4446
4447 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4448 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4449 this section.
4450
4451 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4452 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4453 @end defmac
4454
4455 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4456
4457 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4458 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4459 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4460 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4461 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4462
4463 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4464 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4465 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4466 inequality comparisons are always given @code{CCFPEmode}:
4467
4468 @smallexample
4469 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) ((MODE) != CCFPEmode)
4470 @end smallexample
4471 @end defmac
4472
4473 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4474 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4475 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4476 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4477 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4478 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4479 freely convert unordered compares to ordered one. Then definition may look
4480 like:
4481
4482 @smallexample
4483 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4484 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4485 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4486 @end smallexample
4487 @end defmac
4488
4489 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4490
4491 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4492
4493 @node Costs
4494 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4495 @cindex costs of instructions
4496 @cindex relative costs
4497 @cindex speed of instructions
4498
4499 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4500 on the target machine.
4501
4502 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4503 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4504 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4505 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4506 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4507 that.
4508
4509 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4510 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4511 registers if they are not general registers.
4512
4513 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4514 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4515 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4516 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4517 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4518 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4519
4520 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4521 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4522 @end defmac
4523
4524 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4525
4526 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4527 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4528 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4529 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4530 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4531 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4532 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4533
4534 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4535 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4536 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4537 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4538 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4539 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4540
4541 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4542 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4543 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4544 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4545 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4546 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4547 are the same as to this macro.
4548
4549 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4550 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4551 @end defmac
4552
4553 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4554
4555 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4556 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4557 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4558 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4559 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4560 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4561 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4562 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4563 @end defmac
4564
4565 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4566 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4567 ordinarily expect.
4568
4569 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4570 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4571 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4572 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4573 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4574 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4575
4576 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4577 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4578 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4579 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4580 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4581 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4582 @end defmac
4583
4584 @defmac SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (@var{mode}, @var{alignment})
4585 Define this macro to be the value 1 if memory accesses described by the
4586 @var{mode} and @var{alignment} parameters have a cost many times greater
4587 than aligned accesses, for example if they are emulated in a trap
4588 handler.
4589
4590 When this macro is nonzero, the compiler will act as if
4591 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were nonzero when generating code for block
4592 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4593 Therefore, do not set this macro nonzero if unaligned accesses only add a
4594 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4595
4596 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined. If
4597 this macro is defined, it should produce a nonzero value when
4598 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} is nonzero.
4599 @end defmac
4600
4601 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4602 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4603 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4604 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4605 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4606
4607 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4608 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4609 the number of such sequences.
4610
4611 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4612 optimized for speed rather than size.
4613
4614 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4615 @end defmac
4616
4617 @hook TARGET_USE_BY_PIECES_INFRASTRUCTURE_P
4618
4619 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4620 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4621 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4622 @end defmac
4623
4624 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4625 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4626 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4627 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4628 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4629
4630 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4631 optimized for speed rather than size.
4632
4633 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4634 @end defmac
4635
4636 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4637 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4638 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4639 a block set insn or a library call.
4640 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4641 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4642
4643 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4644 optimized for speed rather than size.
4645
4646 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4647 @end defmac
4648
4649 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4650 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4651 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4652 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4653 @end defmac
4654
4655 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4656 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4657 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4658 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4659 @end defmac
4660
4661 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4662 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4663 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4664 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4665 @end defmac
4666
4667 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4668 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4669 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4670 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4671 @end defmac
4672
4673 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4674 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4675 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4676 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4677 @end defmac
4678
4679 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4680 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4681 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4682 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4683 @end defmac
4684
4685 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4686 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4687 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4688 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4689 @end defmac
4690
4691 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4692 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4693 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4694 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4695 @end defmac
4696
4697 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4698 Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
4699 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4700 @end defmac
4701
4702 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4703 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4704 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4705 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4706 @end defmac
4707
4708 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4709
4710 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4711
4712 @node Scheduling
4713 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4714
4715 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4716 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4717 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4718 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4719
4720 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4721
4722 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4723
4724 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4725
4726 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4727
4728 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4729
4730 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4731
4732 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4733
4734 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4735
4736 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4737
4738 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4739
4740 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4741
4742 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4743
4744 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4745
4746 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4747
4748 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4749
4750 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4751
4752 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4753
4754 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4755
4756 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4757
4758 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4759
4760 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4761
4762 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4763
4764 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4765
4766 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4767
4768 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4769
4770 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4771
4772 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4773
4774 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4775
4776 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4777
4778 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4779
4780 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4781
4782 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4783
4784 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4785
4786 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4787
4788 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4789
4790 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4791
4792 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4793
4794 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4795
4796 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4797
4798 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4799
4800 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4801
4802 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4803
4804 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4805
4806 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4807
4808 @node Sections
4809 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4810 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4811 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4812
4813 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4814 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4815 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4816 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4817 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4818 of sections.
4819
4820 @file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
4821 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4822 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4823 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4824 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
4825 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4826 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4827
4828 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4829 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4830 to be string literals.
4831
4832 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4833 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4834 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4835 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4836
4837 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4838 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4839 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4840 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4841 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4842 reuse @code{text_section}.
4843
4844 All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
4845 if the target does not provide them.
4846
4847 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4848 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4849 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4850 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4851 @end defmac
4852
4853 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4854 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4855 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4856 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4857 @end defmac
4858
4859 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4860 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4861 executed functions in the program.
4862 @end defmac
4863
4864 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4865 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4866 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4867 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4868 @end defmac
4869
4870 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4871 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4872 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4873 initialized, writable small data.
4874 @end defmac
4875
4876 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4877 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4878 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4879 data.
4880 @end defmac
4881
4882 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4883 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4884 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4885 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4886 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4887 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4888 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4889 used.
4890 @end defmac
4891
4892 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4893 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4894 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4895 uninitialized, writable small data.
4896 @end defmac
4897
4898 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4899 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4900 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4901 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4902 @end defmac
4903
4904 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4905 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4906 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
4907 default is @code{'T'}.
4908 @end defmac
4909
4910 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4911 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4912 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4913 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4914 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
4915 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4916 @end defmac
4917
4918 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
4919 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4920 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4921 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4922 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
4923 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4924 @end defmac
4925
4926 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4927 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4928 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4929 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4930 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4931 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4932 @end defmac
4933
4934 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4935 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4936 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4937 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4938 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4939 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4940 @end defmac
4941
4942 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
4943 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
4944 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
4945 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
4946 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
4947 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
4948 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
4949 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
4950 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
4951 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
4952 @end defmac
4953
4954 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
4955 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
4956 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
4957 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
4958 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
4959 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
4960 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
4961 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
4962 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
4963 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
4964 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
4965 @end defmac
4966
4967 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
4968 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
4969 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
4970 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
4971 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
4972 @end defmac
4973
4974 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4975 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
4976 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
4977 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
4978 readonly data section is used.
4979
4980 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4981 @end defmac
4982
4983 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
4984
4985 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
4986
4987 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
4988
4989 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
4990 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
4991 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
4992
4993 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
4994 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
4995 it is unlikely to be called.
4996 @end defmac
4997
4998 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
4999
5000 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
5001
5002 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
5003
5004 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
5005
5006 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
5007
5008 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5009
5010 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5011
5012 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5013
5014 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
5015
5016 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
5017
5018 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
5019
5020 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
5021
5022 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
5023
5024
5025 @node PIC
5026 @section Position Independent Code
5027 @cindex position independent code
5028 @cindex PIC
5029
5030 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5031 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5032 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
5033 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
5034 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
5035 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
5036 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
5037 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
5038 relative addresses.
5039 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5040 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5041
5042 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5043 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5044 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5045 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
5046 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5047 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5048 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5049 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
5050 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
5051 @end defmac
5052
5053 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5054 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
5055 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
5056 the default is zero. Do not define
5057 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5058 @end defmac
5059
5060 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5061 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5062 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5063 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5064 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5065 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5066 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5067 position independent code.
5068 @end defmac
5069
5070 @node Assembler Format
5071 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5072
5073 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5074 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
5075 instructions do.
5076
5077 @menu
5078 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5079 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5080 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5081 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5082 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5083 and termination routines.
5084 * Macros for Initialization::
5085 Specific macros that control the handling of
5086 initialization and termination routines.
5087 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5088 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5089 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5090 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5091 @end menu
5092
5093 @node File Framework
5094 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5095 @cindex assembler format
5096 @cindex output of assembler code
5097
5098 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5099 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5100
5101 @findex default_file_start
5102 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5103
5104 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5105
5106 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5107
5108 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5109
5110 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5111 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5112 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5113 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5114 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5115 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5116 this function.
5117 @end deftypefun
5118
5119 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5120
5121 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5122
5123 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5124
5125 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5126 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5127 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5128 the end of the line.
5129 @end defmac
5130
5131 @defmac ASM_APP_ON
5132 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5133 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5134 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5135 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5136 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5137 @end defmac
5138
5139 @defmac ASM_APP_OFF
5140 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5141 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5142 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5143 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5144 @end defmac
5145
5146 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5147 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5148 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5149 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5150
5151 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5152 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5153 @end defmac
5154
5155 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5156
5157 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5158
5159 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5160 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5161 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5162 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5163 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5164 of the filename using this macro.
5165 @end defmac
5166
5167 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5168
5169 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5170
5171 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5172
5173 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5174 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5175 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5176 @end deftypevr
5177
5178 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5179 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5180
5181 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5182
5183 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5184
5185 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5186
5187 @need 2000
5188 @node Data Output
5189 @subsection Output of Data
5190
5191
5192 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5193
5194 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5195
5196 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECL_END
5197
5198 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5199
5200 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5201 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5202 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5203 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5204 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5205
5206 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5207 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5208 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5209 @end defmac
5210
5211 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5212 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5213 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5214 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5215 @end defmac
5216
5217 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5218 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5219 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5220 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5221 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5222 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5223 pool before the function.
5224 @end defmac
5225
5226 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5227 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5228 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5229 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5230 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5231 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5232 immediately after this call.
5233
5234 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5235 not be defined.
5236 @end defmac
5237
5238 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5239 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5240 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5241 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5242
5243 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5244 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5245 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5246 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5247 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5248 alignment.
5249
5250 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5251 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5252 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5253 Here is how to do this:
5254
5255 @smallexample
5256 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5257 @end smallexample
5258
5259 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5260 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5261 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5262
5263 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5264 @end defmac
5265
5266 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5267 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5268 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5269 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5270 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5271 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5272
5273 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5274 define this macro.
5275 @end defmac
5276
5277 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5278 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5279 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5280 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5281 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5282
5283 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5284 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5285 @end defmac
5286
5287 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5288
5289 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5290 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5291
5292 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5293 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5294 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5295 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5296 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5297 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5298 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5299 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5300 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5301 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5302 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5303 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5304 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5305 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5306 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5307 on the host machine.
5308
5309 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5310 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5311 machine's memory.
5312 @end defmac
5313
5314 @node Uninitialized Data
5315 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5316
5317 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5318 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5319
5320 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5321 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5322 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5323 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5324 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5325 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5326 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5327 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5328 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5329 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5330 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5331 an ordinary undefined external.
5332
5333 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5334 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5335 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5336
5337 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5338 common global variables are output.
5339 @end defmac
5340
5341 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5342 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5343 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5344 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5345 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5346 as the number of bits.
5347 @end defmac
5348
5349 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5350 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5351 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5352 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5353 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5354 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5355 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5356 @end defmac
5357
5358 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5359 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5360 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5361 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5362 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5363
5364 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5365 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5366 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5367 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5368 the name, and a newline.
5369
5370 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5371 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5372 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5373 You do not need to do both.
5374
5375 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5376 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5377 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5378 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5379 common in order to save space in the object file.
5380 @end defmac
5381
5382 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5383 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5384 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5385 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5386 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5387
5388 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5389 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5390 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5391
5392 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5393 static variables are output.
5394 @end defmac
5395
5396 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5397 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5398 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5399 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5400 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5401 as the number of bits.
5402 @end defmac
5403
5404 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5405 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5406 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5407 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5408 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5409 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5410 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5411 @end defmac
5412
5413 @node Label Output
5414 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5415
5416 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5417 This is about outputting labels.
5418
5419 @findex assemble_name
5420 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5421 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5422 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5423 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5424 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5425 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5426 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5427 @end defmac
5428
5429 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5430 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5431 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5432 a function.
5433 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5434 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5435 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5436 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5437
5438 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5439 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5440 @end defmac
5441
5442 @findex assemble_name_raw
5443 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5444 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5445 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5446 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5447 that it is more efficient.
5448 @end defmac
5449
5450 @defmac SIZE_ASM_OP
5451 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5452 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5453 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5454 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5455
5456 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5457 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5458 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5459 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5460 define this macro.
5461 @end defmac
5462
5463 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5464 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5465 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5466 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5467 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5468 provided.
5469 @end defmac
5470
5471 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5472 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5473 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5474 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5475 address.
5476
5477 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5478 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5479 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5480 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5481 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5482 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5483 @end defmac
5484
5485 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5486 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5487 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5488 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5489 @samp{.} is used instead.
5490 @end defmac
5491
5492 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5493 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5494 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5495 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5496 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5497 @end defmac
5498
5499 @defmac TYPE_ASM_OP
5500 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5501 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5502 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5503 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5504
5505 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5506 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5507 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5508 types at all, do not define this macro.
5509 @end defmac
5510
5511 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5512 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5513 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5514 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5515 the default is not to define this macro.
5516
5517 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5518 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5519 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5520 types at all, do not define this macro.
5521 @end defmac
5522
5523 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5524 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5525 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5526 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5527 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5528 you should not count on this.
5529
5530 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5531 definition of this macro is provided.
5532 @end defmac
5533
5534 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5535 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5536 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5537 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5538 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5539 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5540 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5541
5542 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5543 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5544
5545 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5546 of this macro.
5547 @end defmac
5548
5549 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5550 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5551 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5552 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5553 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5554 representing the function.
5555
5556 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5557
5558 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5559 of this macro.
5560 @end defmac
5561
5562 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5563 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5564 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5565 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5566 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5567 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5568
5569 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5570 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5571
5572 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5573 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5574 @end defmac
5575
5576 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5577
5578 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5579 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5580 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5581 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5582
5583 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5584 nothing.
5585 @end defmac
5586
5587 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5588 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5589 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5590 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5591 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5592 something about the size of the object.
5593
5594 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5595 nothing.
5596
5597 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5598 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5599 @end defmac
5600
5601 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5602
5603 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5604
5605 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5606 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5607 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5608 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5609 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5610 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5611 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5612 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5613
5614 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5615 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5616 macro.
5617 @end defmac
5618
5619 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5620 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5621 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5622 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5623 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5624 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5625 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5626 to make @var{name} weak.
5627 @end defmac
5628
5629 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5630 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5631 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5632 declaration of @code{name}.
5633 @end defmac
5634
5635 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5636 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5637 supports weak symbols.
5638
5639 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5640 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5641 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5642 @end defmac
5643
5644 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5645 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5646
5647 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5648 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5649 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5650 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5651 @end defmac
5652
5653 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5654 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5655 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5656 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5657 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5658 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5659 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5660 @end defmac
5661
5662 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5663 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5664 semantics.
5665
5666 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5667 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5668 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5669 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5670 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5671 be emitted as one-only.
5672 @end defmac
5673
5674 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5675
5676 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5677 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5678 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5679 The default is @code{0}.
5680
5681 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5682 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5683 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5684 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5685 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5686 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5687 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5688
5689 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5690 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5691 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5692 table of contents.
5693 @end defmac
5694
5695 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5696 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5697 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5698 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5699 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5700 declaration.
5701
5702 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5703 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5704 @end defmac
5705
5706 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5707
5708 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5709
5710 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5711 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5712 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5713 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5714 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5715 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5716 @end defmac
5717
5718 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5719
5720 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5721 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5722 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5723 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5724 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5725 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5726 @end defmac
5727
5728 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5729 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5730 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5731 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5732 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5733 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5734 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5735 being taken.
5736 @end defmac
5737
5738 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5739
5740 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5741 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5742 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5743 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5744 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5745 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5746 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5747 bundles.
5748
5749 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5750 used.
5751 @end defmac
5752
5753 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5754 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5755 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5756
5757 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5758 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5759 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5760
5761 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5762 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5763 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5764 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5765 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5766 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5767 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5768 @end defmac
5769
5770 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5771 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5772 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5773 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5774 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5775
5776 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5777 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5778 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5779 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5780 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5781 internal static variables in different scopes.
5782
5783 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5784 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5785 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5786 between the name and the number will suffice.
5787
5788 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5789 which is correct for most systems.
5790 @end defmac
5791
5792 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5793 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5794 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5795
5796 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5797 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5798 correct for most systems.
5799 @end defmac
5800
5801 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5802 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5803 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5804 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5805 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5806 the tree nodes are available.
5807
5808 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5809 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5810 correct for most systems.
5811 @end defmac
5812
5813 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5814 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5815 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5816 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5817 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5818 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5819 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5820 @end defmac
5821
5822 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5823 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5824 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5825 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5826 an undefined weak symbol.
5827
5828 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5829 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5830 @end defmac
5831
5832 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5833 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5834 Objective-C methods.
5835
5836 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5837 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5838 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5839 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5840
5841 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5842 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5843 systems define other ways of computing names.
5844
5845 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5846 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5847 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5848 50 characters extra.
5849
5850 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5851 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5852 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5853 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5854
5855 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5856 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5857 @end defmac
5858
5859 @node Initialization
5860 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5861 @cindex initialization routines
5862 @cindex termination routines
5863 @cindex constructors, output of
5864 @cindex destructors, output of
5865
5866 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5867 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5868 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5869 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5870 @code{main} is called.
5871
5872 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5873 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5874 terminates.
5875
5876 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5877 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5878 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5879 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5880
5881 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5882 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5883 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5884
5885 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5886 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5887 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5888 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5889 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5890
5891 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5892 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5893 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5894 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5895 pointer containing zero.
5896
5897 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5898 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5899 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5900 list; destructors in forward order.
5901
5902 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5903 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5904 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5905 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5906 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5907 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5908 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5909 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5910
5911 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
5912 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
5913 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
5914 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5915 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
5916
5917 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5918 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5919 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
5920 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5921 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
5922
5923 @smallexample
5924 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
5925 @end smallexample
5926
5927 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
5928 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
5929 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
5930 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
5931 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
5932
5933 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
5934 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
5935 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
5936 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
5937 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
5938 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
5939
5940 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5941 macro properly.
5942
5943 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
5944 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
5945 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
5946 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5947 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
5948 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
5949
5950 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5951 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5952 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5953 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5954 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5955 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5956 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5957 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
5958 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
5959 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
5960 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
5961 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
5962 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
5963 the initialization process.
5964
5965 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
5966 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
5967 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
5968 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
5969 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
5970 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
5971 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
5972 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
5973 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
5974 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
5975 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
5976
5977 @ifinfo
5978 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
5979 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
5980 @end ifinfo
5981
5982 @node Macros for Initialization
5983 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
5984
5985 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
5986 and termination functions:
5987
5988 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5989 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
5990 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
5991 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
5992 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
5993 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
5994 run the initialization functions.
5995 @end defmac
5996
5997 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
5998 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
5999 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
6000 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6001 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6002 @end defmac
6003
6004 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
6005 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6006 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6007 @end defmac
6008
6009 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
6010 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6011 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6012 @end defmac
6013
6014 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6015 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6016 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
6017 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6018 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
6019 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
6020
6021 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
6022 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
6023 exception tables embedded in the code.
6024 @end defmac
6025
6026 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6027 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6028 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
6029 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6030 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
6031 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
6032 @end defmac
6033
6034 @defmac INVOKE__main
6035 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6036 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6037 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6038 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6039 @end defmac
6040
6041 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
6042 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
6043 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
6044 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
6045 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
6046 @end defmac
6047
6048 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
6049
6050 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
6051
6052 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
6053
6054 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
6055 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6056
6057 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6058 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6059 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6060
6061 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6062 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6063
6064 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6065 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6066 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6067 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6068
6069 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6070 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6071 @end defmac
6072
6073 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6074 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6075 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6076 @command{nm}.
6077 @end defmac
6078
6079 @defmac NM_FLAGS
6080 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6081 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6082 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6083 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6084 produces.
6085 @end defmac
6086
6087 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6088 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6089 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6090 termination functions in shared libraries:
6091
6092 @defmac LDD_SUFFIX
6093 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6094 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6095 @end defmac
6096
6097 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6098 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6099 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6100 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6101 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6102 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6103 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6104 @end defmac
6105
6106 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6107 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6108 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6109 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6110 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6111 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6112 @end defmac
6113
6114 @node Instruction Output
6115 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6116
6117 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6118 This describes assembler instruction output.
6119
6120 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6121 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6122 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6123 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6124 @end defmac
6125
6126 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6127 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6128 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6129 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6130 to registers using alternate names.
6131 @end defmac
6132
6133 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6134 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6135 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6136 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6137 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6138 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6139 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6140 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6141
6142 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6143 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6144 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6145 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6146 ``s0'' and ``s1''.
6147 @end defmac
6148
6149 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6150 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6151 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6152
6153 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6154 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6155 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6156 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6157 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6158 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6159 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6160 so that it will not be output twice.
6161
6162 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6163 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6164 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6165 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6166 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6167
6168 @findex recog_data.operand
6169 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6170 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6171
6172 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6173 in the usual way.
6174 @end defmac
6175
6176 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6177 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6178 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6179 they will be output differently.
6180
6181 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6182 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6183 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6184 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6185 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6186 by changing the contents of the vector.
6187
6188 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6189 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6190 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6191 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6192 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6193 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6194
6195 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6196 @end defmac
6197
6198 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6199
6200 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6201 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6202 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6203 RTL expression.
6204
6205 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6206 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6207 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6208 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6209 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6210 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6211 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6212
6213 @findex reg_names
6214 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6215 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6216 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6217 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6218
6219 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6220 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6221 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6222 @var{code}.
6223 @end defmac
6224
6225 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6226 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6227 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6228 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6229 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6230 in this way.
6231 @end defmac
6232
6233 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6234 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6235 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6236 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6237
6238 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6239 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6240 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6241 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6242 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6243 Format}.
6244 @end defmac
6245
6246 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6247 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6248 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6249 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6250 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6251 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6252 or whatever.
6253
6254 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6255 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6256 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6257 @end defmac
6258
6259 @findex final_sequence
6260 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6261 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6262 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6263 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6264 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6265 being output.
6266
6267 @findex asm_fprintf
6268 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6269 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6270 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6271 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6272 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6273 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6274 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6275 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6276 files can define these macros differently.
6277 @end defmac
6278
6279 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6280 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6281 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6282 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6283 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6284 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6285 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6286 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6287 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6288 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6289 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6290 @end defmac
6291
6292 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6293 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6294 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6295 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6296 first variant.
6297
6298 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6299 @smallexample
6300 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6301 @end smallexample
6302 @noindent
6303 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6304 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6305 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6306 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6307 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6308 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6309 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6310 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6311 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6312
6313 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6314 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6315 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6316
6317 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6318 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6319 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6320 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6321 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6322 opcodes or operand order.
6323 @end defmac
6324
6325 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6326 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6327 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6328 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6329 profiling.
6330 @end defmac
6331
6332 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6333 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6334 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6335 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6336 profiling.
6337 @end defmac
6338
6339 @node Dispatch Tables
6340 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6341
6342 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6343 This concerns dispatch tables.
6344
6345 @cindex dispatch table
6346 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6347 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6348 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6349 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6350 definitions of these labels are output using
6351 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6352 way here. For example,
6353
6354 @smallexample
6355 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6356 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6357 @end smallexample
6358
6359 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6360 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6361 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6362 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6363 mode and flags can be read.
6364 @end defmac
6365
6366 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6367 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6368 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6369
6370 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6371 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6372 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6373 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6374 For example,
6375
6376 @smallexample
6377 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6378 @end smallexample
6379 @end defmac
6380
6381 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6382 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6383 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6384 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6385 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6386 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6387
6388 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6389 for the table.
6390
6391 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6392 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6393 @end defmac
6394
6395 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6396 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6397 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6398 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6399 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6400 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6401 of the preceding label.
6402
6403 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6404 the jump-table.
6405 @end defmac
6406
6407 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6408
6409 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6410
6411 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6412
6413 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6414
6415 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6416
6417 @node Exception Region Output
6418 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6419
6420 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6421
6422 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6423 region.
6424
6425 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6426 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6427 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6428 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6429 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6430
6431 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6432 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6433 @end defmac
6434
6435 @defmac EH_FRAME_IN_DATA_SECTION
6436 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will be placed in the
6437 data section even though the target supports named sections. This
6438 might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker does garbage
6439 collection and sections cannot be marked as not to be collected.
6440
6441 Do not define this macro unless @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is
6442 also defined.
6443 @end defmac
6444
6445 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6446 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6447 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6448 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6449 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6450 @end defmac
6451
6452 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6453 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6454 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6455 @end defmac
6456
6457 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6458 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6459 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6460 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6461 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6462 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6463 @end defmac
6464
6465 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6466 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6467 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6468 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6469 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6470 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6471 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6472
6473 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6474 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6475 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6476
6477 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6478 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6479 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6480 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6481 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6482 depending on this setting.
6483
6484 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6485 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6486 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6487 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6488 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6489 @end deftypefn
6490
6491 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6492 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6493 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6494 command-line option processing.
6495 @end deftypevr
6496
6497 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6498 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6499 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6500 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6501 @end defmac
6502
6503 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6504 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6505 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6506 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6507 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6508 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6509 @end defmac
6510
6511 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6512 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6513 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6514 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6515 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and the positive
6516 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{SDB and DWARF}. Only applicable if
6517 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6518 @end defmac
6519
6520 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6521
6522 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6523
6524 @hook TARGET_DWARF_FRAME_REG_MODE
6525
6526 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6527
6528 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6529
6530 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6531
6532 @node Alignment Output
6533 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6534
6535 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6536 This describes commands for alignment.
6537
6538 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6539 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6540 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6541
6542 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6543 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6544 define the macro.
6545
6546 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6547 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6548 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6549 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6550 @end defmac
6551
6552 @hook TARGET_ASM_JUMP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6553
6554 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6555 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6556 a @code{BARRIER}.
6557
6558 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6559 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6560 define the macro.
6561 @end defmac
6562
6563 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6564
6565 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6566 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6567 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6568
6569 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6570 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6571 define the macro.
6572
6573 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6574 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6575 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6576 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6577 @end defmac
6578
6579 @hook TARGET_ASM_LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6580
6581 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6582 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6583 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6584 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6585
6586 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6587 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6588 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6589 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6590 @end defmac
6591
6592 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6593
6594 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6595 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6596 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6597 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6598 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6599 @end defmac
6600
6601 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6602 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6603 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6604 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6605 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6606 section.
6607 @end defmac
6608
6609 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6610 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6611 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6612 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6613 @end defmac
6614
6615 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6616 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6617 for padding, if necessary.
6618 @end defmac
6619
6620 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6621 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6622 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6623 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6624 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6625 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6626 @end defmac
6627
6628 @need 3000
6629 @node Debugging Info
6630 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6631
6632 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6633 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6634
6635 @menu
6636 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6637 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6638 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6639 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6640 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6641 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6642 @end menu
6643
6644 @node All Debuggers
6645 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6646
6647 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6648 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6649
6650 @defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6651 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6652 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6653 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6654 some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6655 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6656 compiler and another for DBX@.
6657
6658 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6659 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6660 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6661 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6662 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6663
6664 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6665 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6666 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6667 @end defmac
6668
6669 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6670 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6671 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6672 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6673 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6674 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6675 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6676 @option{-g} options is used.
6677 @end defmac
6678
6679 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6680 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6681 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6682 @var{offset}.
6683 @end defmac
6684
6685 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6686 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6687 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6688 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6689 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6690 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG},
6691 @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG}, and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6692
6693 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6694 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6695 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6696 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6697 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6698
6699 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6700 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
6701 @option{-gcoff}, @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
6702 @end defmac
6703
6704 @node DBX Options
6705 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6706
6707 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6708 These are specific options for DBX output.
6709
6710 @defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6711 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6712 in response to the @option{-g} option.
6713 @end defmac
6714
6715 @defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6716 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6717 in response to the @option{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6718 @end defmac
6719
6720 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6721 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6722 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6723 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6724 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6725 if there is any occasion to.
6726 @end defmac
6727
6728 @defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6729 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6730 in the text section.
6731 @end defmac
6732
6733 @defmac ASM_STABS_OP
6734 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6735 use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
6736 If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used. This macro
6737 applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6738 @end defmac
6739
6740 @defmac ASM_STABD_OP
6741 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6742 use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
6743 value is the current location. If you don't define this macro,
6744 @code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used. This macro applies only to DBX debugging
6745 information format.
6746 @end defmac
6747
6748 @defmac ASM_STABN_OP
6749 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6750 use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
6751 name. If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used. This
6752 macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6753 @end defmac
6754
6755 @defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
6756 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6757 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6758 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6759 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6760 @end defmac
6761
6762 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6763 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6764 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6765 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6766 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6767 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6768 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6769 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6770 @end defmac
6771
6772 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6773 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6774 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6775 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6776 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6777 if backslash is correct for your system.
6778 @end defmac
6779
6780 @defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6781 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6782 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6783 variable.
6784 @end defmac
6785
6786 @defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6787 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6788 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6789 @end defmac
6790
6791 @defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6792 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6793 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6794 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6795 @end defmac
6796
6797 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6798 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6799 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6800 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6801 @end defmac
6802
6803 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6804 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6805 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6806 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6807 @end defmac
6808
6809 @defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6810 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6811 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6812 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6813 code.
6814 @end defmac
6815
6816 @defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6817 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
6818 the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
6819 relative to the start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses
6820 an absolute address.
6821 @end defmac
6822
6823 @defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6824 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
6825 the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
6826 start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
6827 @end defmac
6828
6829 @defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
6830 Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6831 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6832 macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
6833 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GCC does not
6834 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6835 number for a type number.
6836 @end defmac
6837
6838 @node DBX Hooks
6839 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6840
6841 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6842 These are hooks for DBX format.
6843
6844 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
6845 A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
6846 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
6847 @var{stream}. @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
6848 invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
6849 unique labels in the assembly output.
6850
6851 This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
6852 if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
6853 @end defmac
6854
6855 @defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6856 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6857 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
6858 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6859 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6860 @end defmac
6861
6862 @defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
6863 Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
6864 extension construct. On those machines, define this macro to turn this
6865 feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6866 @end defmac
6867
6868 @node File Names and DBX
6869 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6870
6871 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6872 This describes file names in DBX format.
6873
6874 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6875 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6876 @var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6877 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6878 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6879
6880 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6881 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6882
6883 It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
6884 text section. You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
6885 to do so. If you do this, you must also set the variable
6886 @var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
6887 @end defmac
6888
6889 @defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6890 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6891 of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
6892 the beginning of the file.
6893 @end defmac
6894
6895 @defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
6896 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6897 that this object file was compiled by GCC@. The default is to emit
6898 an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
6899 @samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
6900 @end defmac
6901
6902 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6903 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6904 compilation of the main source file @var{name}. Output should be
6905 written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
6906
6907 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6908 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6909 @end defmac
6910
6911 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6912 Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
6913 @code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
6914 the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
6915 whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
6916 @end defmac
6917
6918 @need 2000
6919 @node SDB and DWARF
6920 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
6921
6922 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6923 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
6924
6925 @defmac SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6926 Define this macro if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
6927 for SDB in response to the @option{-g} option.
6928 @end defmac
6929
6930 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6931 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6932 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
6933
6934 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
6935
6936 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6937 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6938 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6939 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6940 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6941 @end defmac
6942
6943 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6944 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
6945 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
6946 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
6947 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
6948 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6949 @end defmac
6950
6951 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
6952
6953 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
6954 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
6955 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
6956 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
6957 @end defmac
6958
6959 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
6960
6961 @hook TARGET_FORCE_AT_COMP_DIR
6962
6963 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
6964
6965 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
6966
6967 @hook TARGET_NO_REGISTER_ALLOCATION
6968
6969 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6970 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6971 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6972 @end defmac
6973
6974 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6975 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6976 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g. instruction
6977 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
6978 @end defmac
6979
6980 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{section})
6981 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
6982 section-relative reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the
6983 given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the given @var{section}.
6984 @end defmac
6985
6986 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
6987 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
6988 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6989 @end defmac
6990
6991 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
6992 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
6993 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
6994 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
6995 is referenced by a function.
6996 @end defmac
6997
6998 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
6999
7000 @defmac PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7001 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
7002 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
7003 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
7004 not define them yourself.
7005 @end defmac
7006
7007 @defmac SDB_DELIM
7008 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
7009 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
7010 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
7011 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
7012 required.
7013 @end defmac
7014
7015 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7016 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
7017 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
7018 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
7019 it.
7020 @end defmac
7021
7022 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7023 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
7024 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
7025 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
7026 @end defmac
7027
7028 @defmac SDB_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
7029 A C statement to output SDB debugging information before code for line
7030 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
7031 @var{stream}. The default is to emit an @code{.ln} directive.
7032 @end defmac
7033
7034 @need 2000
7035 @node VMS Debug
7036 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
7037
7038 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7039 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
7040
7041 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
7042 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
7043 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
7044 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
7045 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
7046 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
7047 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
7048 @end defmac
7049
7050 @node Floating Point
7051 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7052 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7053 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7054
7055 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
7056 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7057 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7058 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7059 doing the compilation.
7060
7061 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7062 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
7063 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
7064 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
7065 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
7066 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
7067 target floating point formats are identical.
7068
7069 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
7070 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
7071 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
7072 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
7073
7074 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7075 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
7076 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
7077 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
7078 quantity.
7079 @end defmac
7080
7081 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
7082 Compares for equality the two values, @var{x} and @var{y}. If the target
7083 floating point format supports negative zeroes and/or NaNs,
7084 @samp{REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (-0.0, 0.0)} is true, and
7085 @samp{REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (NaN, NaN)} is false.
7086 @end deftypefn
7087
7088 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUES_LESS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
7089 Tests whether @var{x} is less than @var{y}.
7090 @end deftypefn
7091
7092 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7093 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
7094 @end deftypefn
7095
7096 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7097 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
7098 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
7099 @end deftypefn
7100
7101 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, machine_mode @var{mode})
7102 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
7103 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
7104 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
7105 defined by the C language for both.
7106 @end deftypefn
7107
7108 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7109 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
7110 @end deftypefn
7111
7112 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7113 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
7114 @end deftypefn
7115
7116 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7117 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
7118 @end deftypefn
7119
7120 @deftypefn Macro void REAL_ARITHMETIC (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{output}, enum tree_code @var{code}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
7121 Calculates an arithmetic operation on the two floating point values
7122 @var{x} and @var{y}, storing the result in @var{output} (which must be a
7123 variable).
7124
7125 The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}. Only the
7126 following codes are supported: @code{PLUS_EXPR}, @code{MINUS_EXPR},
7127 @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR}, @code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.
7128
7129 If @code{REAL_ARITHMETIC} is asked to evaluate division by zero and the
7130 target's floating point format cannot represent infinity, it will call
7131 @code{abort}. Callers should check for this situation first, using
7132 @code{MODE_HAS_INFINITIES}. @xref{Storage Layout}.
7133 @end deftypefn
7134
7135 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7136 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
7137 @end deftypefn
7138
7139 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7140 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
7141 @end deftypefn
7142
7143 @node Mode Switching
7144 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7145 @cindex mode switching
7146 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7147
7148 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7149 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7150 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7151
7152 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7153 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7154 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7155 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7156 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7157 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you can't put this into instruction emitting
7158 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
7159
7160 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7161 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7162 return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
7163 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7164 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
7165 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
7166 @code{TARGET_MODE_AFTER}, @code{TARGET_MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{TARGET_MODE_EXIT}
7167 are optional.
7168 @end defmac
7169
7170 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7171 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7172 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7173 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7174 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7175 The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
7176 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7177 entity in question.
7178 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7179 represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7180 switch is needed / supplied.
7181 @end defmac
7182
7183 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7184
7185 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7186
7187 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7188
7189 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7190
7191 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7192
7193 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7194
7195 @node Target Attributes
7196 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7197 @cindex target attributes
7198 @cindex machine attributes
7199 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7200
7201 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7202 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7203 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7204
7205 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7206
7207 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7208
7209 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7210
7211 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7212
7213 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7214
7215 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7216
7217 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7218
7219 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7220 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7221 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7222 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7223 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7224 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7225 on this implementation detail.
7226 @end defmac
7227
7228 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7229
7230 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7231
7232 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7233
7234 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7235
7236 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7237
7238 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7239
7240 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7241
7242 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7243
7244 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7245
7246 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7247
7248 @node Emulated TLS
7249 @section Emulating TLS
7250 @cindex Emulated TLS
7251
7252 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7253 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7254 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7255 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7256 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7257 layer.
7258
7259 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7260 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7261 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7262 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7263
7264 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7265
7266 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7267
7268 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7269
7270 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7271
7272 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7273
7274 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7275
7276 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7277
7278 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7279
7280 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7281
7282 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7283
7284 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7285 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7286 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7287
7288 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7289 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7290 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7291 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7292
7293 @smallexample
7294 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7295 unsigned int d;
7296
7297 d = cp0count + 3;
7298 @end smallexample
7299
7300 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7301 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7302 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7303
7304 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7305 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7306 later in the function.
7307
7308 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7309 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7310 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7311
7312 @node PCH Target
7313 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7314 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7315
7316 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7317
7318 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7319
7320 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7321
7322 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7323
7324 @node C++ ABI
7325 @section C++ ABI parameters
7326 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7327
7328 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7329
7330 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7331
7332 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7333
7334 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7335
7336 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7337
7338 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7339
7340 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7341
7342 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7343
7344 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7345
7346 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7347
7348 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7349
7350 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7351
7352 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7353
7354 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7355
7356 @node Named Address Spaces
7357 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7358 @cindex named address spaces
7359
7360 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7361 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7362 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7363 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7364 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7365 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7366 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7367 @code{const} type attributes.
7368
7369 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7370 pointers to the generic address space.
7371
7372 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7373 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7374 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7375 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7376 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7377 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7378 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7379 always 32 bits).
7380
7381 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7382 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7383 address space.
7384
7385 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7386 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7387 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7388 named address space #1:
7389 @smallexample
7390 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7391 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7392 @end smallexample
7393
7394 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7395
7396 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7397
7398 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7399
7400 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7401
7402 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7403
7404 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7405
7406 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7407
7408 @node Misc
7409 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7410 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7411
7412 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7413 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7414
7415 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7416 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7417 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7418 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7419 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7420 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7421 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7422 @end defmac
7423
7424 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7425 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7426 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7427 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7428 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7429 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7430 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7431 @end defmac
7432
7433 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7434 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7435 elements of a jump-table should have.
7436 @end defmac
7437
7438 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7439 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7440 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7441 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7442 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7443 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7444 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7445 flags can be updated.
7446 @end defmac
7447
7448 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7449 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7450 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7451 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7452 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7453 is in effect.
7454 @end defmac
7455
7456 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7457
7458 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7459 Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
7460 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7461 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7462 @end defmac
7463
7464 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7465 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7466 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7467 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7468 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7469 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7470 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7471 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7472
7473 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7474 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7475 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7476 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7477 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7478
7479 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7480 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7481 of these hard registers @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns nonzero
7482 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7483 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7484
7485 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7486 mode, @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7487 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7488 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7489 @end defmac
7490
7491 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7492 Define this macro if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7493 extends.
7494 @end defmac
7495
7496 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7497
7498 @defmac MOVE_MAX
7499 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7500 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7501 @end defmac
7502
7503 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7504 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7505 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7506 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7507 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7508 at run-time.
7509 @end defmac
7510
7511 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7512 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7513 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7514 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7515 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7516 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7517 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7518 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7519 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7520 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7521 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7522
7523 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7524 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7525 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7526
7527 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7528 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7529 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7530 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7531 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7532
7533 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7534 @end defmac
7535
7536 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7537 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7538
7539 @defmac TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7540 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7541 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7542 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7543 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7544
7545 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7546
7547 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7548 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7549 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7550 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7551 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7552 such cases may improve things.
7553 @end defmac
7554
7555 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7556
7557 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7558 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7559 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7560 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7561 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7562 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7563
7564 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7565 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7566 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7567 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7568 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7569 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7570 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7571 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7572 the compiler.
7573
7574 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7575 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7576 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7577 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7578 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7579 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7580 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7581 expression
7582
7583 @smallexample
7584 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7585 @end smallexample
7586
7587 @noindent
7588 can be converted to
7589
7590 @smallexample
7591 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7592 @end smallexample
7593
7594 @noindent
7595 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7596 tested into the sign bit.
7597
7598 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7599 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7600 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7601 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7602 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7603 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7604
7605 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7606 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7607 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7608 to be used:
7609
7610 @itemize @bullet
7611 @item
7612 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7613 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7614 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7615 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7616 combine the normalization with other operations.
7617
7618 @item
7619 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7620 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7621 other machines.
7622
7623 @item
7624 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7625 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7626 others.
7627
7628 @item
7629 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7630 @end itemize
7631
7632 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7633 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7634 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7635 those cases, e.g., one matching
7636
7637 @smallexample
7638 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7639 @end smallexample
7640
7641 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7642 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7643 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7644 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7645 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7646 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7647 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7648 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7649
7650 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7651 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7652 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7653 @end defmac
7654
7655 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7656 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7657 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7658 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7659 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7660 this macro.
7661 @end defmac
7662
7663 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7664 A C expression that gives a rtx representing the nonzero true element
7665 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7666 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7667 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7668 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7669 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7670 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7671 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7672 given mode.
7673 @end defmac
7674
7675 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7676 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7677 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7678 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7679 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7680 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7681 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7682 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7683 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7684 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7685 this value.
7686
7687 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7688 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7689
7690 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7691 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7692 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7693 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7694
7695 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7696 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7697 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7698 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7699 breaking the API@.
7700 @end defmac
7701
7702 @defmac Pmode
7703 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7704 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7705 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7706 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7707 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7708
7709 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7710 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7711 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7712 to @code{Pmode}.
7713 @end defmac
7714
7715 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7716 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7717 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7718 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7719 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7720 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7721 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7722 @end defmac
7723
7724 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7725 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7726 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7727 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7728 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7729 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7730
7731 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7732 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7733 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7734 @end defmac
7735
7736 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7737
7738 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7739
7740 @defmac NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7741 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C@.
7742 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7743 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7744 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7745 @end defmac
7746
7747 @findex #pragma
7748 @findex pragma
7749 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7750 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7751 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7752 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7753 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7754 setup required for the pragmas.
7755
7756 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7757 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7758 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7759
7760 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7761 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7762
7763 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7764 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7765 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7766 @end defmac
7767
7768 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7769 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7770
7771 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7772 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7773 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7774 pragma of the form
7775
7776 @smallexample
7777 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7778 @end smallexample
7779
7780 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7781 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7782 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7783 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7784 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7785 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7786 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7787 arguments of pragmas registered with
7788 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7789 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7790
7791 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7792 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7793 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7794 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7795 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7796 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7797 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7798 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7799 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7800 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7801 how to build this object file.
7802 @end deftypefun
7803
7804 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7805 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7806 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7807 @end defmac
7808
7809 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7810 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7811 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7812 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7813 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7814 @end defmac
7815
7816 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7817 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7818 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7819 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7820 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7821 @end defmac
7822
7823 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7824 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7825 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7826 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7827 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7828 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7829 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7830 you should define this macro.
7831
7832 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7833 @end defmac
7834
7835 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7836 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7837 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7838 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7839 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7840 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7841 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7842 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7843 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7844 slot of @var{insn}.
7845
7846 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7847 @end defmac
7848
7849 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7850 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7851 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7852 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7853 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7854 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7855
7856 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7857 @end defmac
7858
7859 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_CLOBBERS
7860
7861 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7862 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7863 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7864 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7865 separate math library.
7866
7867 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7868 @end defmac
7869
7870 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7871 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7872 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7873
7874 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7875 is wrong.
7876 @end defmac
7877
7878 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
7879 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
7880 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
7881 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
7882 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7883 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
7884 for cross-profiling.
7885 @end defmac
7886
7887 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7888
7889 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
7890 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
7891 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
7892 1 if it does use cc0.
7893 @end defmac
7894
7895 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7896 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
7897 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
7898 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
7899 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
7900 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
7901 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
7902 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
7903 @end defmac
7904
7905 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7906 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
7907 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
7908 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
7909 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
7910 @end defmac
7911
7912 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
7913 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
7914 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
7915 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
7916 about the currently processed blocks.
7917 @end defmac
7918
7919 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
7920 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
7921 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7922 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7923 to by @var{ce_info}.
7924 @end defmac
7925
7926 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
7927 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
7928 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7929 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7930 to by @var{ce_info}.
7931 @end defmac
7932
7933 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
7934 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
7935 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7936 to by @var{ce_info}.
7937 @end defmac
7938
7939 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7940
7941 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
7942
7943 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
7944
7945 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
7946
7947 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_CHKP_FUNCTION
7948 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_TYPE
7949 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_MODE
7950 @hook TARGET_CHKP_MAKE_BOUNDS_CONSTANT
7951 @hook TARGET_CHKP_INITIALIZE_BOUNDS
7952
7953 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
7954
7955 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
7956
7957 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
7958
7959 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
7960
7961 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
7962
7963 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
7964
7965 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
7966
7967 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
7968
7969 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
7970
7971 @defmac MD_CAN_REDIRECT_BRANCH (@var{branch1}, @var{branch2})
7972
7973 Take a branch insn in @var{branch1} and another in @var{branch2}.
7974 Return true if redirecting @var{branch1} to the destination of
7975 @var{branch2} is possible.
7976
7977 On some targets, branches may have a limited range. Optimizing the
7978 filling of delay slots can result in branches being redirected, and this
7979 may in turn cause a branch offset to overflow.
7980 @end defmac
7981
7982 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
7983
7984 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
7985
7986 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
7987
7988 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
7989
7990 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
7991
7992 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
7993 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
7994 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
7995 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
7996 @end defmac
7997
7998 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
7999 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
8000 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
8001 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
8002 executable files.
8003 @end defmac
8004
8005 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
8006 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
8007 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
8008 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
8009 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
8010 lists.
8011 @end defmac
8012
8013 @defmac MODIFY_JNI_METHOD_CALL (@var{mdecl})
8014 Define this macro to a C expression representing a variant of the
8015 method call @var{mdecl}, if Java Native Interface (JNI) methods
8016 must be invoked differently from other methods on your target.
8017 For example, on 32-bit Microsoft Windows, JNI methods must be invoked using
8018 the @code{stdcall} calling convention and this macro is then
8019 defined as this expression:
8020
8021 @smallexample
8022 build_type_attribute_variant (@var{mdecl},
8023 build_tree_list
8024 (get_identifier ("stdcall"),
8025 NULL))
8026 @end smallexample
8027 @end defmac
8028
8029 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
8030
8031 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS
8032
8033 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CALLEE_SAVED
8034
8035 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
8036
8037 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
8038
8039 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
8040 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
8041 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
8042 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
8043 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
8044 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
8045 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
8046 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
8047 @end defmac
8048
8049 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8050 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8051 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
8052 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
8053 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8054 @end deftypefn
8055
8056 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8057 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8058 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
8059 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
8060 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
8061 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8062 @end deftypefn
8063
8064 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
8065 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
8066 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
8067 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
8068 that are different from @option{-I}.
8069 @end deftypefn
8070
8071 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
8072 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
8073 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
8074 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
8075 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
8076 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
8077 @end defmac
8078
8079 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
8080 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8081 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
8082 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
8083 @end defmac
8084
8085 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
8086 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
8087 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
8088 @end defmac
8089
8090 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
8091 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8092 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
8093 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
8094 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
8095 @end defmac
8096
8097 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
8098 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
8099 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
8100 @end defmac
8101
8102 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
8103 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
8104 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
8105 and scanf formatter settings.
8106 @end defmac
8107
8108 @hook TARGET_RELAXED_ORDERING
8109
8110 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
8111
8112 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
8113
8114 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
8115
8116 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
8117
8118 @hook TARGET_INVALID_PARAMETER_TYPE
8119
8120 @hook TARGET_INVALID_RETURN_TYPE
8121
8122 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
8123
8124 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
8125
8126 @defmac TARGET_USE_JCR_SECTION
8127 This macro determines whether to use the JCR section to register Java
8128 classes. By default, TARGET_USE_JCR_SECTION is defined to 1 if both
8129 SUPPORTS_WEAK and TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS are true, else 0.
8130 @end defmac
8131
8132 @defmac OBJC_JBLEN
8133 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
8134 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
8135 @end defmac
8136
8137 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
8138 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
8139 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
8140 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
8141 and the associated definitions of those functions.
8142 @end defmac
8143
8144 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
8145
8146 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
8147
8148 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
8149
8150 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8151
8152 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8153
8154 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8155
8156 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8157
8158 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8159
8160 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8161
8162 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8163
8164 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8165
8166 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8167 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8168 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8169 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8170 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8171 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8172 representation.
8173
8174 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8175 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8176 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8177 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8178 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8179
8180 @itemize @bullet
8181 @item
8182 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8183 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8184 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8185
8186 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8187 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8188 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8189 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8190 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8191 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8192 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8193 not really a large change.
8194
8195 @item
8196 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8197 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8198 port in this code.
8199
8200 @item
8201 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8202 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8203 @end itemize
8204
8205 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8206 maintainer is familiar with.
8207
8208 @end defmac